2009 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M

Seats and Restraint System ............................. 1-1 Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2 Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ....... 4-2
Safety Belts .............................................. 1-9 Towing ................................................... 4-28
Child Restraints ....................................... 1-25 Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Airbag System ......................................... 1-44 Service ..................................................... 5-3
Restraint System Check ............................ 1-58 Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1 Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-12
Keys ........................................................ 2-3 Rear Axle ............................................... 5-54
Doors and Locks ...................................... 2-10 Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-55
Windows ................................................. 2-16 Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-56
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-18 Windshield Replacement ........................... 5-59
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-59
........... 2-21
Tires ...................................................... 5-62
Mirrors .................................................... 2-38
Appearance Care ..................................... 5-91
OnStar® System ...................................... 2-41
Vehicle Identification ............................... 5-101
Universal Home Remote System ................ 2-44
Electrical System .................................... 5-102
Storage Areas ......................................... 2-52 Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-110
Roof Panel .............................................. 2-57
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Convertible Top ....................................... 2-62 Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1 Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4 Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2
Climate Controls ...................................... 3-25 Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-15
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-32 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ........... 7-17
Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-50 Index ................................................................ 1
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-82

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Canadian Owners
Canadian Owners
(Propriétaires Canadiens)
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, auprès du concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, the names
Helm, Incorporated
CORVETTE, Z06, ZR1 and the CORVETTE Emblem are
P.O. Box 07130
registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation. Detroit, MI 48207
This manual includes the latest information at the time it 1-800-551-4123
was printed. GM reserves the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles Numéro de poste 6438 de langue française
first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General [Link]
Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division
wherever it appears in this manual. Index
This manual describes features that may or may not be
on your specific vehicle. To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the
index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical
Read this manual from beginning to end to learn about list of what is in the manual and the page number where
the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures, symbols, it can be found.
and words work together to explain vehicle operation.
Keep this manual the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 25788997 B Second Printing 2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ii
Safety Warnings and Symbols A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle.
A circle with a slash Notice: These mean there is something that could
through it is a safety damage your vehicle.
symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do not do this,” Many times, this damage would not be covered by the
or “Do not let this happen.” vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice
tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or Notice.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore Vehicle Symbols
the warning.
The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols
instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text
describing the operation or information relating to a
{ CAUTION: specific component, control, message, gage, or indicator.

These mean there is something that could hurt M: This symbol is shown when you need to see your
you or other people. owner manual for additional instructions or information.

*: This symbol is shown when you need to see a

Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid service manual for additional instructions or information.
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
iii
Vehicle Symbol Chart .: Fuel Gage
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information +: Fuses
on the symbol, refer to the index.
i: Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
9: Airbag Readiness Light
j: LATCH System Child Restraints
#: Air Conditioning
*: Malfunction Indicator Lamp
!: Antilock Brake System (ABS)
:: Oil Pressure
g: Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
}: Power
$: Brake System Warning Light
/: Remote Vehicle Start
": Charging System
>: Safety Belt Reminders
I: Cruise Control
7: Tire Pressure Monitor
B: Engine Coolant Temperature
F: Traction Control
O: Exterior Lamps
M: Windshield Washer Fluid
#: Fog Lamps

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
iv
 Section 1 Seats and Restraint System
Front Seats ......................................................1-2 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
Manual Seats ................................................1-2 (LATCH) (Z06 and ZR1 Models Only) .............1-36
Power Seats ..................................................1-3 Securing a Child Restraint in the
Power Lumbar and Side Bolsters ......................1-3 Right Front Seat Position ............................1-40
Heated Seats .................................................1-4 Airbag System ...............................................1-44
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel .........1-4 Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-46
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-6 When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-48
Seatback Latches ...........................................1-8 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-49
Safety Belts .....................................................1-9 How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-49
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-9 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-50
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-14 Passenger Sensing System ............................1-51
Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-22 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-56
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-24 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-25 Vehicle ....................................................1-56
Child Restraints .............................................1-25 Restraint System Check ..................................1-58
Older Children ..............................................1-25 Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-58
Infants and Young Children ............................1-29 Replacing Restraint System Parts
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-33 After a Crash ............................................1-59
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) (Coupe and Convertible
Models Only) ............................................1-35

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-1
Front Seats If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
1. Lift the bar to unlock
Manual Seats the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
{ CAUTION: release the bar.

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to

adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-2
Power Seats Power Lumbar and Side Bolsters

To adjust a power seat: On vehicles with power lumbar and side bolsters:
• Move the control forward or rearward to adjust the Move (A) forward or rearward to adjust lumbar support.
seat forward or rearward. Move (B) up or down to adjust the side bolsters.
• Move the front or rear of the control up or down to
adjust the height of the seat cushion.
Your seat position can be stored and recalled if you have
the memory option. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and
Steering Wheel on page 1-4.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-3
Heated Seats To save seating positions in the memory:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, both outside mirrors, and
On vehicles with heated seats, the buttons are located the telescopic steering column to a comfortable
on the center console. driving position.
The ignition must be on for this feature to work. 2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps let you know
that the position has been stored in the memory.
L: Press to turn the seat on at the high setting, and
twice to turn it to the low setting. A second seating, mirror, and telescopic steering column
position can be set by repeating the above steps and
9: Press to turn the system off. pressing button 2.
To recall a memory position:
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering • On vehicles with an automatic transmission, press
Wheel and release the desired button.
If the vehicle is in P (Park), a single beep sounds and
On vehicles with the memory package, the controls are the memory position is recalled after a brief delay.
located on the driver’s door. If the vehicle is not in P (Park), three beeps sound
1: Saves the seating position for driver 1. and the memory position is not recalled.

2: Saves the seating position for driver 2.

• On vehicles with a manual transmission, when the
vehicle is on, the parking brake needs to be set to
B: Recalls the easy exit position. recall the memory position. Press and release the
desired button.
The numbers on the back of the keyless access A single beep sounds and the memory position is
transmitters correspond to the numbers on the memory recalled after a brief delay.
buttons.
If the vehicle is on and the parking brake is not set,
three beeps sound and the memory position is not
recalled.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-4
For vehicles with the Auto Memory Recall, see “Auto A second exit position can be programmed by repeating
Memory Recall” under DIC Vehicle Personalization the above steps and pressing button 2.
on page 3-73 for more information.
To recall an exit position:
To stop recall movement of the memory feature, press • On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the
one of the power seat controls, power mirror or memory
vehicle needs to be in P (Park).
buttons, or the telescopic steering column switch.
• On vehicles with a manual transmission, the
Easy Exit Seat parking brake must be set.

B (Easy Exit Seat): This button is used to program B: Press to recall an exit position.
and recall the desired driver’s seat exit position. One beep will sound and the exit position for the
To program an exit position: currently identified driver will be recalled.
1. Recall the desired driving position by pressing For vehicles with the Auto Exit Recall, see “Auto Exit
button 1. Recall” under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-73
2. Adjust the seat and the telescopic steering column for more information.
position to a comfortable exit position.
3. Press and hold the exit button until two beeps
sound to let you know that the exit position is
now programmed.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-5
Reclining Seatbacks The seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side of
the seats.

{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.

{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move To adjust the seatback, lean slightly forward to lift your
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could weight off the seatback. Pull completely up on the lever
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always until it stops, and lean back to position the seatback to
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they where you want it. Release the lever to lock the seatback
are locked. into place.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-6
 { CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you
are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion,
have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the
seat and wear your safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is

moving.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-7
Seatback Latches To return the seatback upright, lift up on the latch and
push the seatback rearward. The seatback must be
locked in place.

{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.

To fold a seatback forward, lift the latch located on top

of the backside of the seat. The seatback locks when
folded down.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-8
Safety Belts
{ CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
This section of the manual describes how to use inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
safety belts properly. It also describes some things not
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
to do with safety belts.
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is
{ CAUTION: in a seat and using a safety belt properly.

Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot

be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-35
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
for additional information.
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s) A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
are restrained properly too. serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without safety belts, they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-9
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.

Put someone on it.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on

wheels.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-10
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider The person keeps going until stopped by something.
does not stop. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-11
or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-12
Questions and Answers About Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
Safety Belts home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
am wearing a safety belt? your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety control, such as bad drivers.
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
and get out, is much greater if you are belted. home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
upside down. (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-13
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be
riding in the vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-25 or
Infants and Young Children on page 1-29. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the
vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know. Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-14
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as

much protection this way.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-15
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.

A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as

much protection this way.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-16
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-17
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes
under the armrests.

A: The belt is over an armrest.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-18
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also,
the belt would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal organs like your
liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should

be worn over the shoulder at all times.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.

A: The belt is behind the body.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-20
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-21
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled 3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature may Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
be engaged. If this happens, let the belt go back all If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
the way and start again. Extender on page 1-25.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the Position the release button on the buckle so that
right front seating position may affect the passenger the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System necessary.
on page 1-51 for more information.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-22
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The
shoulder belt. belt should return to its stowed position.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
lap belt on smaller occupants. damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-23
Safety Belt Pretensioners Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
front outboard occupants. Although the safety belt women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safety seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety belts
during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal
and near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for
pretensioner activation are met. And, for vehicles with
side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can help
tighten the safety belts in a side crash.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the vehicle’s safety
belt system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash on page 1-59.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and

the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.
When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that
the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,
as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is
wearing them properly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-24
Safety Belt Extender Child Restraints
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it. Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use
it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The
extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for
securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.

Older children who have outgrown booster seats should

wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-25
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
belt until the child passes the below fit test: and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,
the booster seat. just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt
force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, then
severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
return to the booster seat.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips, safer when properly restrained in rear seating positions
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
than in the front seating positions.
the booster seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
to the booster seat. belts properly.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-26
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-27
 { CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-28
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes { CAUTION:
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the law in every state in the United States and in the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
every Canadian province says children up to some
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
children to play with the safety belts.

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults

and older children, but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every time infants and
young children ride in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate child restraints.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike other
people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-29
 { CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will
suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a
person’s arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-30
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in
the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-31
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints? { CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types. To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
Selection of a particular restraint should take into a crash, infants need complete support. This is
consideration not only the child’s weight, height, and because an infant’s neck is not fully developed
age but also whether or not the restraint will be and its head weighs so much compared with the
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
be used. rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
For most basic types of child restraints, there are so the crash forces can be distributed across the
many different models available. When purchasing a strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label rear-facing child restraints.
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety
standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-32
 Child Restraint Systems
{ CAUTION: A rear-facing infant seat (A)
provides restraint with the
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that seating surface against the
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain back of the infant.
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body with
the harness.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-33
 Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle

{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.

A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to

improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
window. must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) (Coupe and Convertible Models Only) on
page 1-35 or Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) (Z06 and ZR1 Models Only) on page 1-36 for
more information. A child can be endangered in a crash if
the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-34
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the Lower Anchors and Tethers for
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this Children (LATCH) (Coupe and
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
Convertible Models Only)
copy from the manufacturer. Some child restraints have a LATCH system. As part of
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can the LATCH system, your child restraint may have lower
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure attachments and/or a top tether. The LATCH system
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure can help hold the child restraint in place during driving or
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child in a crash. Some vehicles have lower and/or top tether
is in it. anchors designed to secure a child restraint with lower
attachments and/or a top tether.
Securing the Child Within the Child Some child restraints with a top tether are designed to
Restraint be used whether the top tether is anchored or not.
Other child restraints require that the top tether
be anchored. A national or local law may require that
{ CAUTION: the top tether be anchored.

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash

if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-35
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child Lower Anchors and Tethers for
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Children (LATCH) (Z06 and ZR1
Your vehicle does not have lower anchors or top tether Models Only)
anchors to secure a child restraint with the LATCH
system. If a national or local law requires that your Some child restraints have a LATCH system. As part of
top tether be anchored, do not use a child restraint the LATCH system, your child restraint may have lower
in this vehicle because a top tether cannot be properly attachments and/or a top tether. The LATCH system
anchored. You must use the safety belts to secure can help hold the child restraint in place during driving or
your child restraint in this vehicle, unless a national in a crash. Some vehicles have lower and/or top tether
or local law requires that the top tether be anchored. anchors designed to secure a child restraint with lower
Refer to your child restraint instructions and instructions attachments and/or a top tether.
in this manual for securing a child restraint using the Your vehicle does not have lower anchors to
vehicle’s safety belts. See Securing a Child Restraint in accommodate lower attachments. Your vehicle does
the Right Front Seat Position on page 1-40. have a top tether anchor. If your child restraint has a
top tether, make sure your child restraint is properly
installed using the top tether anchor and the vehicle’s
safety belt. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor. Refer to your child
restraint instructions and see Securing a Child Restraint
in the Right Front Seat Position on page 1-40 for
instructions on securing your child restraint using the
vehicle’s safety belts.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-36
In order to use the top tether anchors in your vehicle, Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
you need a child restraint equipped with a top tether. dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with to secure the top tether to the anchor.
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its top Some top tether-equipped child restraints are designed
tether. The following explains how to attach a child for use with or without the top tether being attached.
restraint with the top tether in your vehicle. Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint to

the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle.
The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to
reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child
restraint during driving or in a crash.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-37
Top Tether Anchor Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.

To assist you in locating

the top tether anchors, The top tether anchor is located behind the
the top tether anchor passenger seat.
symbol is located on the
trim cover.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-38
Securing a Child Restraint with a Top 2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
Tether according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are using
{ CAUTION: has a fixed headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a single tether, route
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to the tether over the headrest
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to protect or head restraint.
the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be
seriously injured or killed. Install a LATCH-type
child restraint properly using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with the child
restraint and the instructions in this manual.
If the position you are using
has a fixed headrest or
1. Secure the child restraint using the vehicle’s safety head restraint and you are
belt. See Securing a Child Restraint in the Right using a dual tether, route
Front Seat Position on page 1-40. the tether around the
headrest or head restraint.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Press the ribbed area of the trim cover to 3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
open the cover and expose the anchor. directions to be sure it is secure.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-39
Securing a Child Restraint in the
CAUTION: (Continued)
Right Front Seat Position
This vehicle has airbags. In addition, the vehicle has a Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
the right front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
side impact airbag (if equipped) under certain conditions.
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-51 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-37 for more circumstance, even though it is turned off.
information, including important safety information. Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
{ CAUTION: See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-51 for
additional information.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the Rear-facing child restraints should not be installed in the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the vehicle, even if the airbag(s) are off.
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
CAUTION: (Continued)

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-40
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) (Coupe and restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that came
Convertible Models Only) on page 1-35 or Lower Anchors with the child restraint.
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) (Z06 and ZR1 Models 1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
Only) on page 1-36 for how and where to install the child securing the forward-facing child restraint.
restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured
using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower When the passenger sensing system has turned
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) (Coupe and off the right front passenger frontal airbag and
Convertible Models Only) on page 1-35 or Lower Anchors seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped), the
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) (Z06 and ZR1 Models off indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
Only) on page 1-36 for top tether anchor locations. should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top page 3-37.
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come 2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
anchored. portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be will show you how.
attached.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-41
 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
Position the release button on the buckle so that the retractor to set the lock.
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-42
 7. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) (Coupe and
Convertible Models Only) on page 1-35 or Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
(Z06 and ZR1 Models Only) on page 1-36 for
more information.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbag or airbags are off, the off indicator in the
passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay
on when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator
is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint ”
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, under Passenger Sensing System on page 1-51 for more
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap information.
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-43
Airbag System Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
The vehicle has the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
{ CAUTION:
The vehicle may have the following airbags: You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver. you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbags
passenger.
are not designed to deploy in every crash. In some
All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word crashes safety belts are your only restraint. See
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label When Should an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-48.
near the deployment opening.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger. vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
to the door.
that person.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags are
also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the
force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very
quickly to do their job.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-44
{ CAUTION: { CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the Children who are up against, or very close to, any
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
close to, any airbag when it inflates can be killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily protection for adults and older children, but not for
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward. safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed
Safety belts help keep you in position before and for them. Young children and infants need the
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even protection that a child restraint system can provide.
with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as Always secure children properly in your vehicle.
possible while still maintaining control of the To read how, see Older Children on page 1-25 or
vehicle. Infants and Young Children on page 1-29.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with There is an airbag
seat-mounted airbags. readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system for

malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-36
for more information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-45
Where Are the Airbags?

The right front passenger frontal airbag is in the

instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-46
 { CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an airbag,
the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force
the object into that person causing severe injury or
even death. The path of an inflating airbag must
be kept clear. Do not put anything between an
occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near
any other airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation
path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag.

Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar

If the vehicle has seat-mounted side impact airbags for

the driver and right front passenger, they are in the
side of the seatbacks closest to the door.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-47
When Should an Airbag Inflate? • If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or right • If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
front passenger’s head and chest. However, they are only airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants.
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to crash
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and
severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal sensors,
how quickly your vehicle slows down.
which help the sensing system distinguish between a
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds. moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal
For example: impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment. For more
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
vehicle hits a moving object. Your vehicle may have one or two seat position sensors,
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the depending on what model you have. The seat position
sensor(s) enable the sensing system to monitor the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
position of the driver seat (all models except Z06 and
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
ZR1) and the right front passenger seat (all models).

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-48
Seat position sensor(s) provide information that is used What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
to determine if the airbags should deploy at a reduced
level or at full deployment. In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
Your vehicle may or may not have seat-mounted side inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
impact airbags. See Airbag System on page 1-44. bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are intended to inflate the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag
in moderate to severe side crashes. Seat-mounted module.
side impact airbags will inflate if the crash severity is
above the system’s designed threshold level. The Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design. wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not intended to modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to
inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers, the door.
or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbag
is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that
is struck. How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
airbag should have inflated simply because of the even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
were. For seat-mounted side impact airbags, deployment collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
is determined by the location and severity of the side of the vehicle.
impact.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted
side impact airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-49
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag { CAUTION:
Inflate? on page 1-48 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
than a supplement to safety belts. air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
What Will You See After an Airbag trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you
Inflates? have breathing problems but cannot get out of the
After the frontal and seat-mounted side impact vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that by opening a window or a door. If you experience
some people may not even realize the airbags inflated. breathing problems following an airbag deployment,
Some components of the airbag module may be hot for you should seek medical attention.
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules, see
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-49.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn on the
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be hazard warning flashers when the airbags inflate. You
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and turn
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the the hazard warning flashers off by using the controls for
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to those features.
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving
the vehicle.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-50
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag, Passenger Sensing System
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional
windshield breakage may also occur from the right front The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
passenger airbag. right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible in the rearview mirror
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an when the vehicle is started.
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the
airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include airbag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash. United States
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 7-17 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-18.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
system. Improper service can mean that the airbag
system will not work properly. See your dealer/
retailer for service.

Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, will
be visible during the system check. When the system
check is complete, either the word ON or OFF, or the
symbol for on or off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 3-37.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-51
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag (if equipped) under certain conditions. { CAUTION:
The driver airbags are not affected by the passenger
sensing system. A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
occupant and determine if the right front passenger inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
(if equipped) should be enabled (may inflate) or not. front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
According to accident statistics, children are safer when seat is in a forward position.
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size. We recommend that Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
rear-facing child restraints not be transported in the off the right front passenger frontal airbag and
vehicle, even if the airbags are off. seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped), no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. circumstance, even though the airbag(s) are off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-52
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and airbag(s) to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped) if: lit to remind you that the airbag or airbags are active.
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied. For some children who have outgrown child restraints
• The system determines that an infant is present in and for very small adults, the passenger sensing
a rear-facing infant seat. system may or may not turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
• The system determines that a small child is present (if equipped), depending upon the person’s seating
in a child restraint. posture and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who has
• The system determines that a small child is present outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
in a booster seat. properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a { CAUTION:
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
system or the passenger sensing system.
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
right front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag (if equipped), the off indicator will light away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-36
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag(s) are off. for more information, including important safety
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-37. information.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
on (may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped)
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the right front passenger seat.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-53
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Restraint Adult-Size Occupant
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 1-40.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle
off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and
adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure
that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child
restraint into the seat cushion.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
6. Restart the vehicle.
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
If the on indicator is still lit, do not install a child because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
restraint in this vehicle and check with your
dealer/retailer.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-54
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the If the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the
system to detect that person and enable the right front way, the child restraint locking feature will be engaged.
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing
airbag (if equipped): system to turn the airbag(s) off for some adult size
1. Turn the vehicle off. occupants. If this happens, let the belt go back all the
way and start again.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
seat massagers. cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,
seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position. passenger sensing system operates. We recommend
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended. equipment except when approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in Vehicle on page 1-56 for more information about
this position for two to three minutes after the on modifications that can affect how the system operates.
indicator is lit.
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation { CAUTION:
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in may interfere with the proper operation of the
the Index for additional information about the importance passenger sensing system.
of proper restraint use.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-55
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Adding Equipment to Your
Vehicle Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
service manual have information about servicing the from working properly?
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
on page 7-16. frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts of
{ CAUTION: the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel,
the inside review mirror, front sensors, or airbag
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system.
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid system for the right front passenger position, which
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the includes sensors that are part of the passenger seat.
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-56
The passenger sensing system may not operate Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
properly if the original seat trim is replaced with vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM this will affect my airbag system?
covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different
vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device, The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
system. This could either prevent proper deployment Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger Your dealer/retailer and the service manual have
sensing system from properly turning off the information about the location of the airbag sensors,
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
System on page 1-51.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-57
Restraint System Check Airbags
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
Checking the Restraint Systems maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-36 for more information.
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened, or
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,
broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any
anchorages are all working properly.
opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn Airbag Inflate? on page 1-49. See your dealer/retailer
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. for service.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-35 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 5-95.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-58
Replacing Restraint System Parts If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a Crash After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
{ CAUTION: dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
properly protect the person using it, resulting in system parts.
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
make sure your restraint systems are working safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being
properly after a crash, have them inspected and used at the time of the crash.
any necessary replacements made as soon as If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
possible. system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-36.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-59
✍ NOTES

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-60
 Section 2 Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-24
Keyless Access System ...................................2-4 Starting the Engine .......................................2-24
Keyless Access System Operation ....................2-5 Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-26
Doors and Locks ............................................2-10 Manual Transmission Operation ......................2-30
Door Locks ..................................................2-10 Parking Brake ..............................................2-32
Power Door Locks ........................................2-12 Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission) ......2-33
Automatic Door Lock .....................................2-13 Shifting Out of Park ......................................2-34
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock .............2-13 Parking the Vehicle (Manual Transmission) .......2-35
Lockout Protection ........................................2-13 Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-35
Hatch ..........................................................2-14 Engine Exhaust ............................................2-36
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................2-37
Windows ........................................................2-16
Power Windows ............................................2-17 Mirrors ...........................................................2-38
Sun Visors ...................................................2-18 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................2-38
Compass .....................................................2-38
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-18 Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-40
Theft-Deterrent System ..................................2-18 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................2-40
Immobilizer ..................................................2-20 Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-40
Immobilizer Operation ....................................2-20 Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-41
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-21 OnStar® System .............................................2-41
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-21
Front Air Dam ..............................................2-22 Universal Home Remote System ......................2-44
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-23 Universal Home Remote System Operation ......2-45

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-1
 Section 2 Features and Controls
Storage Areas ................................................2-52 Roof Panel .....................................................2-57
Glove Box ...................................................2-52 Removing the Roof Panel ..............................2-57
Cupholders ..................................................2-52 Storing the Roof Panel ..................................2-60
Center Console Storage .................................2-52 Installing the Roof Panel ................................2-61
Floor Mats ...................................................2-53 Convertible Top ..............................................2-62
Rear Storage Area ........................................2-53 Convertible Top (Manual) ...............................2-62
Convenience Net ..........................................2-55 Convertible Top (Power) ................................2-69
Cargo Cover ................................................2-55

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-2
Keys

{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keyless
access transmitter is dangerous for many reasons,
children or others could be badly injured or even
killed. They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keyless access
transmitter in the vehicle and they could be
seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a
closing window. Do not leave the keyless access
transmitter in a vehicle with children.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-3
 The key, located inside the This vehicle has a keyless access system with
keyless access transmitter, pushbutton start. See Ignition Positions on page 2-23
can be used to lock and for information on starting the vehicle.
unlock the glove box and to
open the hatch/trunk lid if Notice: If you ever lose your transmitter(s) and/or
power to the vehicle is lost. key, it could be difficult to get into your vehicle.
See Hatch on page 2-14 for You may even have to damage your vehicle to get
more information. in. Be sure you have a spare transmitter and/or key.
If you are locked out of the vehicle, contact Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-7.

Keyless Access System

The Keyless Access System operates on a radio
Press the button (A) near frequency subject to Federal Communications
the bottom of the keyless Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
access transmitter to This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
remove the key. Never Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
pull the key out without
pressing the button. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-4
Changes or modifications to this system by other than Keyless Access System Operation
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment. The Keyless Access System transmitter functions
If there is a decrease in the keyless access transmitter work up to 100 feet (30 m) away from the vehicle.
range, try this: Keyless Unlocking
• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far Press the door handle sensor to unlock and open the
from the vehicle. It may be necessary to stand doors if the keyless access transmitter is within range.
closer during rainy or snowy weather. See Door Locks on page 2-10 and “Passive Door Unlock”
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-73 for
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the additional information.
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again. Keyless Locking
• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery The doors lock after several seconds if all doors are
Replacement” under Keyless Access System closed and at least one keyless access transmitter
Operation on page 2-5. has been removed from the interior of the vehicle.
To customize whether the doors automatically lock
• Make sure that an electronic device such as a when exiting the vehicle, see “Passive Door Locking”
cellular phone or lap top computer is not causing under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-73 for
interference. additional information.
• If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for
service.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-5
Keyless Trunk Opening K (Unlock): Press once to unlock only the driver door.
Press the hatch/trunk release button located on the rear Press K twice within five seconds to unlock both
of the hatch/trunk lid above the license plate to open the doors. The interior lamps may come on.
trunk if the keyless access transmitter is within range.
See Hatch on page 2-14 for additional information. Pressing K also recalls the memory settings.
See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on
There are other conditions that can affect the page 1-4 for more information.
performance of the transmitter. See Keyless Access
System on page 2-4 Keyless Access System. } (Hatch/Trunk): Press and hold for about
one second to unlock the hatch/trunk. If the engine
This vehicle comes with
is running, the shift lever must be in P (Park) for
two transmitters.
an automatic transmission. For a manual transmission,
the shift lever must be in NEUTRAL with the parking
brake set.

L (Panic): Press to sound the horn. Press any other

button on the keyless access transmitter to stop it.
The vehicle comes with two transmitters. Each
transmitter will have a number on top of it, “1” or “2”.
These numbers correspond to the driver of the vehicle.
For example, the memory seat position for driver 1 will be
recalled when using the transmitter labeled “1”, if enabled
through the DIC. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
Wheel on page 1-4 and DIC Vehicle Personalization on
Q (Lock): Press once to lock the doors. When Q is page 3-73 for more information.
pressed twice, the lights flash and the horn sounds to
confirm locking.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-6
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only keyless access transmitters programmed to this
vehicle will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased and programmed through
your dealer/retailer. The vehicle can be reprogrammed
so that lost or stolen transmitters no longer work. Each
vehicle can have up to four transmitters programmed to it.
Programming with a Recognized
Transmitter
A new transmitter can be programmed to the vehicle
when there is one recognized transmitter. For vehicles
sold in Canada, two recognized transmitters are
required to program a new transmitter. 7. Place the new transmitter in the glove box
1. The vehicle must be off. transmitter pocket with the buttons facing the
passenger side.
2. Both the recognized and new transmitters must be
with you. 8. A beep sounds once programming in complete.
The DIC displays READY FOR #3 or 4, or
3. Insert the vehicle key into the key cylinder located
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FOBS LEARNED.
above the license plate.
9. To program additional transmitters, repeat Step 7.
4. Open the hatch/trunk.
Press Acc. on the ignition switch if programming is
5. Turn the key five times within five seconds. complete.
6. The DIC displays READY FOR FOB #2, 3 or 4. 10. Press K on each newly programmed transmitter to
complete the process.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-7
Programming without a Recognized
Transmitter
This procedure requires three ten minutes cycles to
complete the programming process. United States
owners are permitted to program a new transmitter to
their vehicle when a recognized transmitter is not
available. The Canadian immobilizer standard requires
that Canadian owners see their dealer/retailer for
programming new transmitters when two recognized
transmitters are not available.
1. The vehicle must be off.

2. Place the new transmitter in the glove box

transmitter pocket with the buttons facing the
passenger side.
3. Insert the vehicle key into the key cylinder located
above the license plate.
4. Open the hatch/trunk.
5. Turn the key five times within five seconds.
6. The DIC message displays OFF-ACCESSORY TO
LEARN.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-8
 7. Press Acc. on the ignition switch. 14. Press Acc. on the ignition switch if programming is
8. The DIC reads WAIT 10 MINUTES and counts complete.
down to zero. 15. Press K on each newly programmed transmitter to
9. The DIC displays OFF-ACCESSORY TO LEARN complete the process.
again.
Starting the Vehicle with a Low
10. Press Acc. on the ignition switch.
Transmitter Battery
11. Steps 8, 9 and 10 will be repeated two more times.
If the transmitter battery is weak, the DIC may display
12. A beep sounds and the DIC reads READY FOR
NO FOBS DETECTED when trying to start the vehicle.
FOB #1. All previously known transmitter
To start the vehicle, place the transmitter in the glove
programming has been erased.
box transmitter pocket with the buttons facing the
13. A beep sounds once programming in complete. passenger side. Then, with the vehicle in P (Park)
The DIC displays READY FOR FOB #2. for an automatic transmission, press the brake pedal
To program additional transmitters, take transmitter 1 and / . If the vehicle has a manual transmission, press
out of the transmitter pocket and place transmitter 2 the clutch and / . Replace the transmitter battery as
in the pocket. Up to four transmitters can be soon as possible. Change the transmitter battery if
programmed. The DIC then displays MAXIMUM the DIC displays FOB BATTERY LOW.
NUMBER OF FOBS LEARNED and exits the
programming mode.
Press Acc. on the ignition switch to complete the
process.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-9
Battery Replacement Doors and Locks
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static Door Locks
from your body could damage the transmitter.

{ CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle.
When a door is locked it will not open. You
increase the chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash if the doors are not locked.
So, wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object stroke. Always lock your vehicle whenever you
inserted into the slot on the side or back of the leave it.
transmitter.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object. door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down. Locking your doors can help prevent this from
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery. happening.
4. Reassemble the transmitter.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-10
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle. From the inside, use the power door lock switch located
at the top of the door panel near both windows.
From the outside, press the lock or unlock button on
See Power Door Locks on page 2-12.
the keyless access transmitter.
To open a door from the inside, press the button (B) in
front of the door handle and push the door open. You will
hear a tone when the button is pressed.
If power to the vehicle or the keyless access transmitter
is lost, there are two ways to open the door.

Door Open to Show Location of Door Handle Sensor

When you have the transmitter with you, you may also
unlock and open the door by squeezing the door handle
sensor (A). You do not have to press the unlock button
on the transmitter. You will be able to open the door
when you press the door handle sensor and the vehicle From inside the vehicle, use the door release handle
recognizes your keyless access transmitter. When the located on the floor next to each seat. Pull the handle up
passenger door is opened first, the driver’s door will also to unlock and unlatch the door.
unlock.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-11
 Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on the doors.
There is an indicator light on the rear of the door
near the window.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.

When pressed, a beep sounds. If the door is closed, the
light blinks twice. If the door is open, the light flashes.

Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.

When pressed, a beep sounds. If the door is closed
when pressed, the light comes on for a few seconds,
then turns off. If the door is open when pressed, the light
stays on.
From outside the vehicle, use the key in the cylinder
above the license plate to open the hatch then use the
door release tab located on the carpet inside the hatch on
the driver’s side of the vehicle. Pull the tab to unlock and
unlatch the driver’s door. See Keys on page 2-3 for
information on opening the hatch during a loss of power.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-12
Automatic Door Lock With the vehicle stopped and the engine running, door
unlocking can be programmed through the Driver
The vehicle is programmed so that, when the doors are Information Center (DIC). This allows the driver to choose
closed, the ignition is on and the shift lever is moved out various unlock settings. For programming information,
of P (Park)for automatic transmissions, or when vehicle see DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-73.
speed becomes faster than 8 mph (13 km/h) for manual
transmissions, both doors will lock. Lockout Protection
Use the power door unlock switch to unlock the door
when the vehicle is not in P (Park). When the door is Your vehicle can be programmed to sound the horn
closed again, the doors will lock either when your foot is three times and unlock the driver door when both doors
removed from the brake or the vehicle speed becomes are closed and there is a keyless access transmitter
faster than 8 mph (13 km/h). inside the vehicle. When the driver door is opened,
a reminder chime will sound continuously. The vehicle
will remain locked only when at least one transmitter
Programmable Automatic Door has been removed from the vehicle and both doors are
Unlock closed. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-73.

The vehicle is programmed so that when the shift lever is

moved into P (Park) for automatic transmission vehicles
or when the ignition is turned OFF or is in Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) for manual transmission
vehicles, both doors will unlock.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-13
Hatch
CAUTION: (Continued)

{ CAUTION: • Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting

that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven Control System in the Index.
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any • If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
objects that pass through the seal between the disable the power liftgate function.
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 2-36.
cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or Notice: Closing the hatch/trunk lid forcefully or
trunk/hatch open: from the sides can cause damage to the glass, the
defogger or the weather stripping. Be sure objects
• Close all of the windows. will fit in the hatch/trunk area before closing the
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the hatch/trunk lid. When closing the hatch/trunk
instrument panel. lid, gently pull down from the center.
CAUTION: (Continued) Notice: Do not store heavy or sharp objects in the
rear storage compartments located in the hatch/trunk
area. The objects could damage the underbody.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-14
Hatch/Trunk Lid Release
There are several ways to release the hatch/trunk lid.
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the shift
lever must be in P (Park). For manual transmission
vehicles, the parking brake must be set when the
ignition is started for the hatch/trunk release to operate.
The parking brake does not need to be set when the
ignition is off for the hatch/trunk release to operate.
See Parking Brake on page 2-32.

V (Hatch/Trunk): Press the hatch/trunk lid release

button, located on the instrument panel to the left of the
steering wheel. The theft-deterrent alarm system
must not be armed.

} (Hatch/Trunk): Press the hatch/trunk lid release If your vehicle has lost battery power, open the hatch/
button on the keyless access transmitter. See Keyless trunk using the vehicle key. See Keys on page 2-3 for
Access System on page 2-4. more information. The key lock cylinder is located on
Press the hatch/trunk release button located on the rear the rear of the hatch/trunk lid above the license plate.
of the hatch/trunk lid above the license plate, as long Turn the vehicle key clockwise in the lock.
as you have your transmitter with you.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-15
Closing the Rear Compartment The emergency trunk release handle is only
(Except Convertible) intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
To close the rear compartment lid of your coupe, pull
down on the rear edge of the lid. Lower it until the power There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
pull down latch feature activates and it will close the handle located on the rear wall of the trunk below
rest of the way and latch automatically. the latch. This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle down to open the
Emergency Trunk Release Handle trunk from the inside.
(Coupe)
Windows

{ CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release

handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-16
 Power Windows

The power window switches are located on each door.

Pull up or press down on the front of the switch to
raise or lower the window.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) allows you to use
the power windows when the ignition is off. For more
information, see Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 2-24.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-17
Express-Down Window Sun Visors
Press the front of the switch to the second position to Pull the visor toward you, or move it to the side to help
activate the express-down feature. If you want to stop the reduce glare.
window as it is lowering, press the switch again.
To use the lighted mirror, lift the cover.
Window Indexing
This feature automatically lowers the window a small Theft-Deterrent Systems
amount when the door is opened. When the door is
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
closed, the window will raise to its full up position. If either
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
window does not index properly, it could be due to loss of
they do not make it impossible to steal.
power. Before returning to your dealer/retailer for service,
perform the power window initialize procedure.
Theft-Deterrent System
Power Window Initialize
This vehicle has a theft-deterrent alarm system.
After a power reconnect such as battery replacement,
the window index-up feature will not function until The security light flashes if
the system is initialized. a door is open and locked
Once power is restored: with the power door lock
switch.
1. Close the door.
2. Raise the window and hold the switch up for
three seconds after the window is closed.
3. Release the switch, then hold the switch up again
for three seconds and release. If this light stays on while the engine is running, the
vehicle needs service.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-18
Arming the System Testing the Alarm
To arm the system: To test the system:
• Press Q on the keyless access transmitter. 1. Make sure the trunk lid/hatch is latched.
• Open the door and lock the door with the power 2. Lower the window on the driver door.
door lock switch. The security light should flash. 3. Manually arm the system.
Remove the keyless access transmitter from inside
4. Close the doors and wait 30 seconds.
the vehicle and close the door. The security light
stops flashing and stays on. After 30 seconds, 5. Reach through the open window and manually pull
the light should turn off. the release lever on the floor.
The vehicle can be programmed to automatically 6. Press the unlock button on the transmitter to turn
lock the doors and arm the theft-deterrent system off the alarm.
when you exit the vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
If the alarm does not sound, check to see if the horn
Personalization on page 3-73.
works. The horn fuse may be blown. See Fuses and
If a door or the hatch/trunk is opened without using Circuit Breakers on page 5-103. If the horn works, but the
the keyless access transmitter, the alarm goes off. alarm does not go off, see your dealer/retailer.
The horn sounds for two minutes, then goes off to
save battery power. The vehicle will not start without Disarming the System
a keyless access transmitter present.
Press the unlock button on the keyless access
The theft-deterrent system does not arm if the driver transmitter or squeeze the door handle sensor while the
door is locked with the power door lock switch after the transmitter is near the vehicle to unlock a door. Unlocking
doors are closed. a door any other way sets off the alarm. If the alarm
If the keyless access transmitter is removed from the sounds, press the unlock button on the keyless access
vehicle while a passenger is in it, have them lock transmitter to disarm it.
the doors after they are closed. The alarm will not arm, Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
so the passenger will not set it off. deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-19
Immobilizer Immobilizer Operation
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. The vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: The system is automatically armed when the ignition is
1. This device may not cause interference. turned off.
2. This device must accept any interference received, The immobilization system is disarmed when the ignition
including interference that may cause undesired is turned to OFF/ACCESSORY or START and a valid
operation. transmitter is found in the vehicle.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
The security light comes on if there is a problem with
1. This device may not cause interference. arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
2. This device must accept any interference received, The system has one or more keyless access transmitters
including interference that may cause undesired that are matched to an immobilizer control unit in the
operation of the device. vehicle. Only a correctly matched keyless access
Changes or modifications to this system by other than transmitter starts the vehicle. The vehicle may not
an authorized service facility could void authorization to start if the keyless access transmitter is damaged.
use this equipment. If the engine does not start and the security light comes
on, there may be a problem with the immobilizer system.
Press the START button again.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-20
If the vehicle does not start and the keyless access
transmitter appears to be undamaged, try another
Starting and Operating
keyless access transmitter. Or, place the transmitter in Your Vehicle
the transmitter pocket. See “NO FOBS DETECTED”
under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56 for
additional information. Check the fuse. See Fuses and New Vehicle Break-In
Circuit Breakers on page 5-103. If the engine still does
not start with the other transmitter, the vehicle needs Follow these recommended guidelines during the first
service. If the engine does start, the first transmitter may 1,500 miles/2414 km of driving this vehicle. Parts have
be faulty. See your dealer/retailer or have a new keyless a break-in period and performance will be better in the
access transmitter programmed to the vehicle. long run.
The immobilizer system can learn new or replacement For the first 200 miles/322 km:
keyless access transmitters. Up to four keyless • To break in new tires, drive at moderate speeds and
access transmitters can be programmed for the vehicle. avoid hard cornering for the first 200 miles/322 km.
To program additional transmitters, see “Matching
transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under Keyless Access • New brake linings also need a break- in period. Avoid
System Operation on page 2-5. making hard stops during the first 200 miles/322 km.
This is recommended every time brake linings are
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or replaced.
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-21
For the first 500 miles/805 km: Front Air Dam
• Avoid full throttle starts and abrupt stops.
The vehicle is equipped with a front air dam which has
• Do not exceed 4,000 engine rpm. minimal ground clearance.
• Avoid driving at any one constant speed, fast or Vehicles with the ZR-1 package also come with a splitter
slow, including the use of cruise control. made from carbon fiber.
• Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle
when the engine speed will exceed 4000 RPM.
• Do not let the engine labor. Never lug the
{ CAUTION:
engine in high gear at low speeds. With a manual
transmission, shift to the next lower gear. This rule The splitter in the ZR-1 is made from carbon fiber.
applies at all times, not just during the break-in When damaged, the exposed edges can be very
period. sharp. A person could be injured by these sharp
For the first 1,500 miles/2414 km: edges. Use caution when washing the vehicle,
• Do not participate in track events, sport driving coming in contact with, or removing damaged
schools, or similar activities during the first carbon fiber parts. See your dealer/retailer for
1,500 miles/2414 km. replacement.
• Check engine oil with every refueling and add if
necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be higher Under normal operation, these components will
than normal during the first 1,500 miles/2414 km. occasionally contact some road surfaces (speed bumps,
driveway ramps, etc.). This can be heard inside the
vehicle as a scraping noise. This is normal and does
not indicate a problem.
Use care when approaching bumps or objects on road
surfaces and avoid them when possible.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-22
Ignition Positions 9 Acc. (OFF/ACCESSORY): When the engine is
on or the vehicle is in accessory power mode, it is
The vehicle has an recommended that a manual transmission be placed
electronic keyless ignition in R (Reverse). An automatic transmission must be
with a pushbutton start. placed in P (Park). Then press the Acc. button to turn the
engine off and place the vehicle in RAP. See “Retained
Accessory Power (RAP)” later for more information. If an
automatic vehicle is not correctly placed in P (Park) a
SHIFT TO PARK message will display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
For more information, see DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-56.
When the engine is off, press this button to place the
vehicle in accessory mode. ACCESSORY MODE ON will
display on the Driver Information Center (DIC). This mode
In order to shift out of P (Park), the vehicle must be allows you to use things like the radio and the windshield
running or in Acc. mode and the regular brake pedal wipers while the engine is off. Use accessory mode if you
must be applied. must have the vehicle in motion while the engine is off, for
example, if the vehicle is being pushed or towed.
/ (START): Press this button while your foot is on the After being in accessory mode for about 10 minutes, the
brake for an automatic transmission, or while pressing vehicle will automatically enter RAP or OFF, depending
in the clutch for a manual transmission, to start the on if the doors are opened or closed.
engine. If the vehicle is in OFF or Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) mode, the keyless access transmitter must
be inside the vehicle to start the engine.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-23
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Cell phone chargers can interfere with the operation of
the Keyless Access System. Battery chargers should
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to not be plugged in when starting or turning off the engine.
10 minutes after the engine is turned off: To start the vehicle, do the following:
• Audio System 1. For vehicles with an automatic transmission, with
• Power Windows your foot on the brake pedal, press the START
button located on the instrument panel. For vehicles
These features continue to work up to 10 minutes after with a manual transmission, you must also press in
the engine is turned off or until either door is opened. the clutch pedal while pressing the START button.
If a door is opened, the power windows and audio
system will shut off. If there is not a keyless access transmitter in the
vehicle or if there is something causing interference
with it, the DIC will display NO FOBS DETECTED.
Starting the Engine See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56
for more information.
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral) for an
automatic transmission. For a manual transmission the 2. When the engine begins cranking, let go of the
vehicle can be started in Neutral or any other gear as button and the engine cranks automatically until
long as the clutch pedal is pressed. To restart a vehicle it starts. If the battery in the keyless access
with a manual transmission when you are already transmitter is weak, the DIC displays FOB
moving, use the Neutral position only. To restart a vehicle BATTERY LOW. You can still drive the vehicle.
with an automatic transmission when you are already See “Battery Replacement” under Keyless Access
moving, use N (Neutral). System Operation on page 2-5 for more information.
If the fob battery is dead, you need to insert the
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
fob into the fob slot to enable engine starting.
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage
See “No Fobs Detected” under DIC Warnings
the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the
and Messages on page 3-56.
vehicle is stopped.
3. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.
The keyless access transmitter must be inside the Operate the engine and transmission gently until
vehicle for the ignition to work. the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-24
 4. If the engine does not start and no DIC message is Notice: The engine is designed to work with
displayed, wait 15 seconds before trying again to let the electronics in the vehicle. If electrical parts or
the cranking motor cool down. accessories are added, you could change the way the
If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds, engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C), check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor damage would not be covered by the vehicle
while cranking for up to 15 seconds maximum. Wait warranty.
at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the Stopping the Engine
cranking motor to cool down. When the engine starts,
let go of the accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly If the vehicle has an automatic transmission, move
but then stops again, repeat these steps. This clears the shift lever to P (Park) and press and hold the Acc.
the extra gasoline from the engine. (Off/Accessory) button, located on the instrument panel,
until the engine shuts off. If the shift lever is not in
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of P (Park), the engine shuts off and the vehicle goes
time, by pressing the START button immediately into the Accessory Mode. The DIC displays SHIFT TO
after cranking has ended, can overheat and damage PARK. Once the shifter is moved to P (Park), the vehicle
the cranking motor, and drain the battery. Wait at turns off. If the vehicle has a manual transmission,
least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the it is recommended that you move the shift lever to
cranking motor to cool down. R (Reverse) and set the parking brake after you turn off
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking the engine by pressing the Acc. (Off/Accessory) button.
System. This feature assists in starting the engine and If the keyless access transmitter is not detected inside
protects components. Once cranking has been initiated, the vehicle when it is turned to off, the DIC displays
the engine continues cranking for a few seconds or until NO FOB – OFF OR RUN?.
the vehicle starts. If the engine does not start, cranking
automatically stops after 15 seconds to prevent cranking See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56 for
motor damage. To prevent gear damage, this system more information.
also prevents cranking if the engine is already running.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-25
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are several different
{ CAUTION:
positions for the shift lever.
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
P (Park): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the
best position to use when starting the engine because Park (Automatic Transmission) on page 2-33.
the vehicle cannot move easily.
Be sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before starting
the engine.
The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply the brakes and
then press the shift lever button before you can shift
from P (Park) when the vehicle is running. If you cannot
shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the shift lever
and push the shift lever all the way into P (Park) as you
maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever
button and move the shift lever into another gear.
See Shifting Out of Park on page 2-34.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-26
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up. Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
moving forward could damage the transmission. by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped. D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provide
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, the best fuel economy. If you need more power for
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission, passing, and you are:
see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow • Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push the
on page 4-22. accelerator pedal about halfway down.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not • Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the accelerator all the way down.
vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only. If the Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
vehicle needs towing, see Towing Your Vehicle on could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
page 4-28. Control on page 4-12.
S (Sport Mode): When in S (Sport Mode), the
{ CAUTION: transmission will work as an automatic until you use
the Manual Paddle Shift Controls, which activates driver
manual gear selection. See Manual Paddle Shift later in
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is this section. While in S (Sport Mode), the transmission’s
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your computer determines when the vehicle is being driven
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could in a competitive manner and will select and hold the
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit transmission in lower gears and have more noticeable
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear upshifts for sportier vehicle performance.
while the engine is running at high speed.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-27
Manual Paddle Shift To use the system, shift from P (Park) position to S (Sport
Mode) while stopped and with the engine running, or from
While in the S (Sport Mode) position, the paddles D (Drive) with the vehicle moving. When accelerating the
located on the steering wheel can be used to manually vehicle from a stop in snowy and icy conditions, you may
up-shift or down-shift the transmission. want to shift to 2 (Second) or 3 (Third) gear. A higher
gear allows you to gain more traction on slippery
surfaces. If traction control is active, upshifts are delayed
to increase your control of the vehicle. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-6.
While the Manual Paddle Shift gear selection system is
active, the transmission will automatically downshift
through the gears as the vehicle slows. The transmission
will select 2 (Second) gear as the vehicle stops. From a
stop, the vehicle will start from and hold 2 (Second) gear
unless the driver manually paddle shifts into a different
gear or selects D (Drive). The driver can select 1 (First)
gear for maximum acceleration from a stop.

When using the Manual

Paddle Shift feature while
in S (Sport Mode), the
While in S (Sport Mode), push the paddle above the current gear will be
steering wheel spokes to up-shift to the next gear, or pull displayed in the Driver
on the paddle behind the steering wheel spokes to Information (DIC), or the
down-shift to the next gear. Head-Up Display (HUD), if
the vehicle has either of
these features.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-28
If the vehicle has a Navigation system, see “Head-Up The vehicle speeds required for Manual Paddle Shift
Display (HUD)” in the Index of the navigation manual. up-shifts depend on several vehicle inputs, which
will vary the allowed up-shift speed by a few mph (km/h).
The Manual Paddle Shift system will not allow either an
up-shift or a down-shift if the vehicle speed is too fast • Up-shifts to 4 (Fourth) gear require approximately
or too slow, nor will it allow a start from 4 (Fourth) or 22 mph (35 km/h).
higher gear.
• Up-shifts to 5 (Fifth) gear require approximately
If up-shifting does not occur when needed, vehicle 28 mph (45 km/h).
speed will be limited to protect the engine.
• Up-shifts to 6 (Sixth) gear require approximately
The transmission will also automatically down-shift as 41 mph (65 km/h).
the vehicle slows down and comes to a stop.
To prevent damage to the powertrain, Manual Paddle
When the transmission gear does not respond to a shift downshifts to a lower gear cannot be done above certain
change, the DIC will show an X over the gear display. speeds. The maximum speed allowed for downshifting
of gears 1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) are:
When a requested shift is
denied due to the speed • Into 4 (Fourth) gear over 168 mph (270 km/h)
restrictions shown, the DIC • Into 3 (Third) gear over 124 mph (200 km/h)
will momentarily show
an X over the gear display • Into 2 (Second) gear over 81 mph (130 km/h)
and a chime will sound. • Into 1 (First) gear over 45 mph (72 km/h).
If the driver does not request an upshift as the engine
speed approaches fuel shut off RPM, the engine
If the vehicle has a HUD, and the transmission gear does speed will be limited to protect the engine. See
not respond to a shift change, a chime will sound and the Tachometer on page 3-35 for more information.
HUD will momentarily show an X over the gear display.
Manual Paddle Shift operation is available for use with
Cruise Control. See Cruise Control on page 3-10
for more information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-29
Manual Transmission Operation 2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the
accelerator pedal and shift into 2 (Second). Then, slowly
let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator
This is the shift pattern for
pedal.
the six-speed manual
transmission. 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth) and 6 (Sixth): Shift into
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth) and 6 (Sixth) the same
way you do for 2 (Second). Slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the
clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to Neutral.
Neutral: Use this position when you start or idle the
engine. The shift lever is in Neutral when it is centered
Here is how to operate the transmission: in the shift pattern, not in any gear.
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal and shift into 1 (First). R (Reverse): To back up, press down the clutch pedal
Then slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press and shift into R (Reverse). Just apply pressure to get the
the accelerator pedal. lever past 5 (Fifth) and 6 (Sixth) into R (Reverse). Let up
on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator
You can shift into 1 (First) when you are going less than
pedal.
40 mph (64 km/h). If you come to a complete stop and it
is hard to shift into 1 (First), put the shift lever in Neutral The six-speed manual transmission has a feature that
and let up on the clutch. Press the clutch pedal back allows you to safely shift into R (Reverse) while the
down. Then shift into 1 (First). vehicle is rolling at less than 3 mph (5 km/h). You will be
locked out if you try to shift into R (Reverse) while the
vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h).

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-30
Shift Speeds (Manual Transmission) If the engine speed drops below 900 rpm, or if the
engine is not running smoothly, you should downshift to
the next lower gear. You may have to downshift two
or more gears to keep the engine running smoothly or
{ CAUTION: for good engine performance.
Notice: When shifting gears, do not move the shift
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you could lever around unnecessarily. This may damage
lose control of the vehicle. You could injure the transmission. Shift directly into the next gear.
yourself or others. Do not shift down more than
one gear at a time when you downshift. One to Four Shift Light
(Manual Transmission)
This chart shows when to shift to the next higher gear
for the best fuel economy. When this light comes on,
you can only shift from
1 (First) to 4 (Fourth)
Manual Transmission Recommended instead of 1 (First) to
Shift Speeds in mph (km/h)
2 (Second).
Acceleration Shift Speed
Engine
1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
All
Engines 15 (24) 25 (40) 40 (64) 45 (72) 50 (80)
See One-to-Four Shift Light (Manual Transmission) on
page 3-39 for more information.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-31
Downshifting (Manual Transmission) The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward 4 (Fourth)
and 3 (Third). Make sure you move the lever into
Do not downshift into the gear shown below at a speed 2 (Second) or 5 (Fifth). If you let the shift lever move in
greater than shown in the table: the direction of the pulling, you may end up shifting
from 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth) or from 6 (Sixth) to 3 (Third).
1 (First) 50 mph (80 km/h)
2 (Second) 74 mph (119 km/h) Parking Brake
3 (Third) 101 mph (163 km/h)
4 (Fourth) 130 mph (209 km/h) The parking brake lever is located to the right of the
center console.
Notice: If you skip more than one gear when you To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down.
downshift, or if you race the engine when you Pull the parking brake lever up. If the ignition is on, the
release the clutch pedal while downshifting, you brake system warning light will come on.
could damage the engine, clutch, driveshaft or the
transmission. Do not skip gears or race the To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
engine when downshifting. down. Then push the release button in as you move the
parking brake lever all the way down.
The six-speed transmission has a spring that centers
the shift lever near 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth). This spring Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
helps you know which gear you are in when you are overheat the brake system and cause premature
shifting. Be careful when shifting from 1 (First) to wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
2 (Second) or downshifting from 6 (Sixth) to 5 (Fifth). that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-32
Shifting Into Park (Automatic Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Transmission) Running (Automatic Transmission)

{ CAUTION: { CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly if
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
left the engine running, the vehicle can move brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be the engine running, it could overheat and even
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. leave the vehicle with the engine running.

1. Hold the brake pedal set the parking brake. If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brake is
See Parking Brake on page 2-32 for more firmly set before you leave it. After you have moved the
information. shift lever into P (Park), hold down the regular brake
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by holding in the pedal. See if you can move the shift lever away from
button on the lever and pushing the lever all the P (Park) without first pushing the button on the lever.
way toward the front of the vehicle. If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully
locked into P (Park).
3. Press the Acc. button (ignition switch) to turn the
engine off.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-33
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission) Shifting Out of Park
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift the Shift lock release prevents shifting out of P (Park)
transmission into P (Park) properly, the weight of the unless the vehicle is running or in Accessory mode and
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the brake pedal is applied.
the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of P (Park). This is called “torque lock.” The shift lock release is always functional except in
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and the case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than
then shift into P (Park) properly before you leave the 9-volt) battery. See Jump Starting on page 5-50 for
driver seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into P (Park)” more information.
listed previously in this section. To shift out of P (Park) use the following:
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of 1. Apply the brake pedal.
P (Park) before you release the parking brake.
2. Press the shift lever button.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another 3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the transmission parking pawl, so you can
pull the shift lever out of P (Park).

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-34
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park): Parking Over Things That Burn
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever button again. { CAUTION:
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park), Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
service. over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.
Parking the Vehicle (Manual
Transmission)
Before you get out of the vehicle, move the shift lever
into R (Reverse) and firmly apply the parking brake.
Once the shift lever has been placed into R (Reverse)
with the clutch pedal pressed in, you can turn the ignition
off and release the clutch.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-35
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION: (Continued)

{ CAUTION: • The vehicle’s exhaust system has been

modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
• There are holes or openings in the vehicle
body from damage or after-market
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO modifications that are not completely sealed.
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation • Drive it only with the windows
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that completely down.
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes). • Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
• The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different. Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an
enclosed area such as a garage or a building that
• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or has no fresh air ventilation.
damage.
CAUTION: (Continued)

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-36
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you { CAUTION:
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle
if the automatic transmission shift lever is not
{ CAUTION: fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.
The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor the engine is running unless you have to. If you
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may have left the engine running, the vehicle can move
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
It can cause unconsciousness and even death. on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has and move the shift lever to P (Park).
no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see
Engine Exhaust on page 2-36. Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission)
on page 2-33.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-37
Mirrors Map Lamps
If the mirror has map lamps, they are located at the
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror bottom of the mirror. To manually turn the lamps on or
off, press the button next to each lamp.
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
rearview mirror with a compass display and/or Cleaning the Mirror
map lamps, and OnStar®. If the vehicle has OnStar, Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a
there are three control buttons located at the bottom of soft towel dampened with water.
the mirror. See OnStar® System on page 2-41 for
more information on the services OnStar® provides.
Compass
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
The mirror automatically changes to reduce glare
Compass Operation
from headlamps behind you. A time delay feature With the compass feature on, each time the vehicle is
prevents rapid changing from the day to night positions started, the compass will take a few seconds to adjust
while driving under lights and through traffic. and display the current compass heading. For example,
NE is displayed for north-east.
P (On/Off): The automatic dimming feature is activated
when the vehicle is started. Press and hold this button
for up to six seconds to turn this feature on or off.

T (Indicator Light): This light turns on when the

automatic dimming feature is active.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-38
Compass Calibration To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
Press P once to turn the compass display on or off. number on the zone map that follows.
If after several seconds the display does not show a
compass heading, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Interference can be caused
by a magnetic antenna mount, note pad holder or similar
object. If the letter C or CAL appears in the compass
window, the compass needs calibration.
Depending on the mirror, in order to calibrate, CAL must
be displayed in the mirror compass windows. If CAL is not
displayed, press P for several seconds or until CAL is
displayed.
If the compass has map lamps, it can be placed in
calibration mode by pressing and holding the left map
light button until a C appears on the compass display.
The mirror compass can be calibrated by driving the
vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until
the display reads a direction.

Compass Variance
2. Press and hold P until a Z and a zone number
The mirror is set to zone eight. If you do not live in zone displays. The compass is now in zone mode.
eight or drive out of the area, the compass variance
needs to be changed to the appropriate zone. 3. Once the zone number displays, press P
repeatedly until you reach the correct zone number.
Stop pressing P and the mirror returns to normal
operation.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-39
Outside Power Mirrors Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when
going through an automatic car wash. To fold, push the
mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to
return it to the original position.

Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror

If your vehicle has this feature, the driver side outside
mirror adjusts for the glare of headlamps behind you.
This feature is controlled by the on and off setting on the
inside rearview mirror.

Outside Convex Mirror

Controls for the outside power mirrors are located on
the driver door.
To adjust the mirrors: { CAUTION:
1. Move the top selector control to the left or right to
select either the driver or passenger mirror. A convex mirror can make things, like other
2. Use the arrows located on the four-way control pad vehicles, look farther away than they really are.
to move the mirror in the desired direction. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or
vehicle and the area behind it can be seen. glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.
Keep the control in the center position when not
adjusting either outside mirror. The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
If the vehicle has the memory feature, a preferred mirror mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
position can be stored. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and the driver seat.
Steering Wheel on page 1-4.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-40
Outside Heated Mirrors most vehicles. OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation service,
with one trial route, is available on most vehicles. Press
the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor contact
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the Roadside Service.
mirrors.
OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
Climate Control System on page 3-25 for more glove box literature.
information.
Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
® Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until
OnStar System the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar. After the
first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select a monthly or
annual subscription payment plan. If a payment plan is
not selected, the OnStar system and all services,
including airbag notification and emergency services,
may be deactivated and no longer available. For more
information visit [Link] (U.S.) or [Link] (Canada),
or press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor.
Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles.
To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live described below, or for a full description of OnStar
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security, services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s
information, and convenience services. If the airbags Guide in the glove box or visit [Link] (U.S.) or
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic [Link] (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request (1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the
emergency services be sent to your location. If the OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours
keys are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at a day, 7 days a week.
1-888-4-ONSTAR to have a signal sent to unlock
the doors. OnStar Hands-Free Calling, including
30 trial minutes good for 60 days, is available on
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-41
OnStar Services Available with the OnStar Hands-Free Calling
Safe & Sound Plan OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN) the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
(If equipped) Minute Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes
• Link to Emergency Services good for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be
linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or
• Roadside Assistance a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert [Link] or [Link], or speak with an OnStar
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
• GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only) Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
system can provide voice-guided driving directions.
OnStar Services Included with Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor
locate a business or address and download driving
Directions & Connections Plan directions to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to the
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services desired destination will play through the audio system
speakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or information.
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-42
OnStar Virtual Advisor How OnStar Service Works
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar Hands-Free The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
Calling that uses minutes to access location-based information. This information is automatically sent to an
weather, local traffic reports, and stock quotes. Press OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed,
the phone button and give a few simple voice commands the emergency button is pressed, or if the airbags or
to browse through the various topics. See the OnStar AACN system deploy. This information usually includes
Owner’s Guide for more information. This feature is only the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
available in the continental U.S. additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle
was involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehicle
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls was hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling is used, the vehicle also sends
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be
OnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can provide
used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
services where it is located.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-108 for
more information. OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
information.
area has coverage, network capacity and reception when
the service is needed, and technology that is compatible
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas, or
at all times.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-43
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
Universal Home Remote
available. System
The vehicle must have a working electrical system, The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF)
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle in This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or wireless Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
phone network congestion. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
Your Responsibility 2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor operation.
cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is
red, the system may not be functioning properly. Press The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization Certificate
the OnStar button and request a vehicle diagnostic. If the number is KOBGTV06A.
light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired and all services have been
deactivated. Press the OnStar button to confirm that the
OnStar equipment is active.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-44
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. This system provides a way to replace up to three
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: remote control transmitters used to activate devices
1. This device may not cause interference. such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired Do not use this system with any garage door opener
operation of the device. that does not have the stop and reverse feature.
This includes any garage door opener model
The Canadian Registration ID number is 3521A-GTV06A. manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than Read the instructions completely before attempting to
an authorized service facility could void authorization to program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
use this equipment. it may be helpful to have another person assist with
programming the transmitter.
Universal Home Remote System Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for
Operation use in other vehicles, as well as, for future programming.
Only the original remote control transmitter is needed for
Fixed Code programming. The programmed buttons
should be erased when the vehicle is sold or the lease
ends. See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons”
later in this section.
Park the vehicle outside of the garage when
programming a garage door. Be sure that people
and objects are clear of the garage door or gate that is
being programmed.
On vehicles with this feature there are three round Light
Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lights above the Universal
Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions below.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-45
Programming Universal Home To program up to three devices:
Remote — Rolling Code 1. Press START or put the vehicle in accessory mode.
See Ignition Positions on page 2-23 for additional
For questions or help programming the Universal information.
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to Programming can only occur when the vehicle is
[Link]. running or in accessory mode.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.

2. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside

buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-46
 4. Immediately return to the vehicle. Press and hold the
Universal Home Remote button that will be used to
control the garage door until the garage door moves.
The indicator light, above the selected button, should
slowly blink. This button may need to be held for up
to 20 seconds.
5. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
blinks rapidly until programming is complete.
6. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-6, choosing
3. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener a different function button in Step 4 than what was
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn” used for the garage door opener.
or “Smart” button. It can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head If these instructions do not work, the garage door
unit and may be a colored button. Press this opener is probably a Fixed Code unit. Follow the
button. After pressing this button, complete the Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
following steps in less than 30 seconds. garage door opener.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-47
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
For questions or help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
[Link].
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.
To program up to three devices:
1. Press START or put the vehicle in accessory mode.
See Ignition Positions on page 2-23 for additional 2. To verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed
information. Code unit, remove the battery cover on the hand
Programming can only occur when the vehicle is held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of the
running or in accessory mode. garage door opener motor. If there are a row of dip
switches similar to the graphic above, the garage
door opener is a Fixed Code unit. If you do not
see a row of dip switches, return to the previous
section for Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.
The hand held transmitter can have between
eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand
of transmitter.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-48
 The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
could also have a row of dip switches that can
be used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the motor
head and hand held transmitter are different, or if
the dip switch settings are different, use the
dip switch settings on the motor head unit to
program the Universal Home Remote. The motor
head dip switch settings can also be used when the
original hand held transmitter is not available.

Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions

The panel of switches might not appear exactly as

they do in the examples above, but they should
be similar.
The switch positions on the hand-held transmitter
could be labeled, as follows:
• A switch in the up position could be labeled as
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions • A switch in the down position could be labeled
as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
• A switch in the middle position could be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-49
 3. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position, write
“Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings written down in Step 3 now
become the button strokes to be entered into the
Universal Home Remote in Step 5. Be sure to
enter the switch settings written down in Step 3, in
order from left to right, into the Universal Home
Remote, when completing Step 5.
4. From inside the vehicle, first firmly press all three
buttons at the same time for about three seconds. 5. The indicator lights blink slowly. Enter each switch
Release the buttons to put the Universal Home setting from Step 3 into the vehicle’s Universal Home
Remote into programming mode. Remote. You have two and one-half minutes to
complete Step 5. Now press one button on the
Universal Home Remote for each switch setting
as follows:
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-50
 6. After entering all of the switch positions, again, Using Universal Home Remote
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights turn on. Press and hold the appropriate button for at least
half of a second. The indicator light comes on while
7. Press and hold the button that will be used to the signal is being transmitted.
control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light above the selected Operation can occur:
button should slowly blink. This button may need • If the vehicle is in accessory mode.
to be held for up to 55 seconds.
• If the vehicle is in running.
8. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light blinks rapidly until • If the vehicle is in Retained Accessory Mode (RAP).
programming is complete. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-24
9. Press and release the same button again. for more information.
The garage door should move, confirming • Up to an additional 10 minutes after RAP finishes.
that programming is successful and complete.
• Up to 10 minutes after any door is opened.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device, Reprogramming Universal Home
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-9, choosing Remote Buttons
a different button in Step 7 than what was used for
the garage door opener. Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by
repeating the instructions.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-51
Erasing Universal Home Remote Storage Areas
Buttons
The programmed buttons should be erased when the Glove Box
vehicle is sold or the lease ends.
Open the glove box by lifting up on the lever. Use the
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the key to lock and unlock the lighted glove box.
Universal Home Remote device:
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the Cupholders
same time for approximately 20 seconds, until
the indicator lights, located directly above the Two cupholders are located on the center console next
buttons, begin to blink rapidly. to the shift lever. Slide the handle from the left to the
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both right side to access the lid.
buttons. The codes from all buttons are erased.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote Center Console Storage
System, call the customer assistance phone number
To use this storage area, pull the cover up on the driver
under Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6.
side front edge of the console and swing it to the
passenger side.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-52
Floor Mats Rear Storage Area
The floor mats are designed to remain in position and Two rear storage compartments are located in the floor
out of reach of the accelerator pedal. The driver side of the rear hatch/trunk area.
floor mat is held in place by two locator pins and the
passenger side is held in place by one.
Make sure that the driver side floor mat is properly
placed on the floor so that it does not block the
movement of the accelerator pedal.

To remove a floor mat, pull

up on the rear of the mat
to disconnect it from the
locator pins.

Convertible shown, Coupe similar

To access a storage compartment, pull up to open the
cover. The covers cannot be removed.
For Z06 models, the right rear compartment stores the
battery and cannot be used for storage.
To reinstall the floor mats, position the openings in the
floor mat over the locator pins and push it down into For ZR1 models, do not use the right and left rear
place. compartments as storage.
Notice: Do not store heavy or sharp objects in the
rear storage compartments located in the hatch/trunk
area. The objects could damage the underbody.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-53
Rear Trunk Partition
For vehicles with the power convertible top option only,
there is a trunk partition to keep cargo from getting in the
way of the convertible top. The trunk partition must be in
place for the convertible top to move. If the trunk partition
is not properly in place the ATTACH TRUNK PARTITION
Driver Information Center (DIC) message displays. See
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56 for more
information.
The trunk partition is a flat carpeted board with a
horizontal flap that can be attached to the top of the
trunk to divide the storage compartment or it stores flat
when not in use.

Pull the divider up and snap it onto the snaps on both

sides of the trunk.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-54
Convenience Net Using the Cargo Cover
Use the convenience net, located in the rear, to store 1. Hook the elastic loops
small loads as far forward as possible. The net on the front corners (A)
should not be used to store heavy loads. of the shade to the
T-nuts located on the
front corners of the rear
Cargo Cover hatch frame.
For vehicles with this feature, the security shade can
provide hidden storage in the rear area of the vehicle.
The shade is also helpful in blocking the glare from
the removable roof when it is stored in the rear
compartment.

2. Hook the elastic loops on the rear corners (B) of the

shade to the hooks recessed inside the rear hatch
frame, near the rear corners.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-55
 4. Push the loop to the top
of the striker (base
plate).

3. Grasp the loop at the rear center of the shade and

wrap it around the striker assembly.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-56
Roof Panel Notice: If you drop or rest a roof panel on its
edges, the roof panel, paint and/or weatherstripping
On vehicles with a removable roof panel, follow the may be damaged. Always place the roof panel in
procedures when removing or installing it. the stowage receivers after removing it from
the vehicle.
Removing the Roof Panel 1. Park on a level surface and set the parking brake.
Shift an automatic transmission into P (Park). Shift
a manual transmission into N (Neutral).

{ CAUTION: 2. Make sure the ignition is off.

3. Lower both sun visors.
Do not try to remove a roof panel while the vehicle 4. Open the rear hatch and remove any items that
is moving. Trying to remove the roof panel while may interfere with proper storage of the roof
the vehicle is moving could cause an accident. panel.
The panel could fall into the vehicle and cause 5. Lower the windows.
you to lose control, or it could fly off and strike There are two release latches on the front of the
another vehicle. You or others could be injured. roof panel and one rear release latch on the back of
Remove the roof panel only when the vehicle is the roof panel.
parked.

Until you are sure you can remove the panel alone,
have someone help you.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-57
 6. To unlock the release latches on the front of the The driver’s side handle moves toward the driver’s
roof panel, grasp each handle and pull it outward. door. The passenger’s side handle moves toward
the passenger’s door.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-58
 7. To unlock the rear of 8. Stand on one side of the vehicle, and if necessary,
the roof panel’s rear have someone stand on the other side. Together,
release latch, press the carefully lift the front edge of the roof panel up
back of the release and forward.
handle (B). Then press 9. When the roof panel is loosened from the vehicle,
the button on the one person should grasp the roof panel as close to
front of the release the center as possible and lift it away from the
handle (A). vehicle.

Pull down the latch lever.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-59
Storing the Roof Panel 2. Insert the roof panel so
that the outside front
edges line up between
the receiver covers.
{ CAUTION: Push forward on the
roof panel until it stops.
If a roof panel is not stored properly, it could be
thrown about the vehicle in a crash or sudden
maneuver. People in the vehicle could be injured.
Whenever you store a roof panel in the vehicle,
always be sure that it is stored securely in the
proper location.
3. Gently place the roof
panel down so that the
Notice: If you drop or rest a roof panel on its back pins on the roof
edges, the roof panel, paint and/or weatherstripping panel drop into the
may be damaged. Always place the roof panel in receivers in the back of
the stowage receivers after removing it from the storage area.
the vehicle.
1. Turn the roof panel so that the front edge of the
panel is facing the storage area.

Press down firmly to seat the pins in the receivers.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-60
Installing the Roof Panel 3. To remove the roof panel from the rear storage
area of the vehicle, pull up on the rear edge and
remove it from the storage area.
4. Carefully place the roof panel over the top of the
{ CAUTION: vehicle.
5. Position the rear edge of the roof panel to the
An improperly attached roof panel may fall into or weatherstrip on the back of the roof opening.
fly off the vehicle. You or others could be injured. Then align and fit the pins at the rear of the roof
After installing the roof panel, always check that it panel inside the openings in the rear overhead
is firmly attached by pushing up on the underside weatherstrip. Gently lower the front edge of the
of the panel. Check now and then to be sure the roof panel to the front of the roof opening.
roof panel is firmly in place. 6. Turn the front release
handles inward so that
they latch to the
Notice: If you drop or rest a roof panel on its closed position.
edges, the roof panel, paint and/or weatherstripping
may be damaged. Always place the roof panel in
the stowage receivers after removing it from
the vehicle.
In most cases, it makes it easier if two people install the
roof panel.
1. Park on a level surface and set the parking brake.
Shift an automatic transmission into P (Park).
Shift a manual transmission into N (Neutral). 7. Push up on the handle of the rear roof release
2. Check that the front release latches and the rear handle to latch its hook in the closed position.
release latch on the vehicle’s roof opening are in 8. Push and pull the roof panel up and down and
their opened positions before attempting to side-to-side to ensure the roof panel is securely
install the roof panel. installed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-61
Convertible Top The parts of the manual convertible top that are used
when lowering and raising it are:

Convertible Top (Manual)

For care and cleaning of the convertible top, see
Convertible Top on page 5-98 under “Service and
Appearance Care”. High pressure car washes may
cause water to enter the vehicle.
If the vehicle has this feature, the following
procedures explain the proper operation of the
manual convertible top.

A. Front Edge of the Convertible Top

B. Rear Edge of the Convertible Top
C. Tonneau Cover
Notice: Leaving the convertible top down and
exposing the interior of your vehicle to outdoor
conditions may cause damage. Always close
the convertible top if leaving your vehicle outdoors.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-62
Notice: Lowering the convertible top when there Lowering the Manual Convertible Top
are objects in the storage area could damage
it or break the glass rear window. Always verify that 1. Park on a level surface. Shift an automatic
no objects are in the storage area before lowering transmission into P (Park) and set the parking
the convertible top. brake. Shift a manual transmission into N (Neutral)
and set the parking brake.
Notice: Lowering the top if it is damp, wet, or dirty 2. Make sure the ignition is off.
can cause stains, mildew, and damage to the inside
of your vehicle. Dry off the top before lowering it. 3. Make sure the trunk is closed.
Notice: If you lower the top on your vehicle in cold
weather (0°F/-18°C or lower), you may damage
top components. Do not lower the top in cold
weather.
Notice: If you raise or lower the convertible top
while the vehicle is in motion, you could damage the
top or the top mechanism. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always put an
automatic transmission in (P) Park or a manual
transmission in (N) Neutral before raising or
lowering the convertible top.

4. The convertible top front latch, located above the

inside rearview mirror, must be unlocked. Pull the
convertible top front latch down and turn it clockwise
to unlock it.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-63
 5. Lift upward on the front edge (A) of the convertible 6. Tilt the driver’s seatback forward and press the
top off of the windshield frame. Then lift upward on tonneau cover release button located on the
the rear edge (B) of the convertible top so it is underside of the tonneau cover (C) behind the
vertical to the tonneau cover (C). The front edge (A) driver’s seat. Then raise the tonneau cover (C).
and rear edge (B) should be straight up. If the tonneau cover does not release and
three chimes are heard, check to make sure the
trunk lid is closed. Also, the cover will not release
if the vehicle alarm is armed.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-64
 After pressing the release button, the driver’s
and passenger’s door glass should retract to the
full-down position.
If the vehicle has lost battery power, the tonneau
cover (C) can still be opened using the manual
release cable.
The tonneau cover emergency manual release
cable is located underneath the carpeting behind the
passenger’s seat head restraint, on the underside
forward edge of the tonneau cover. To access
the cable, lift and pull back the carpeting. Also,
see Hatch on page 2-14 for information on
the emergency trunk release handle.
Notice: If you lower the convertible top into the
storage compartment and the rear edge of the top
is not in the full-down position, you could damage 7. Pull the cable to release the tonneau cover.
the top. Always verify that the rear edge of the
convertible top is in the full-down position before
lowering the top into the storage compartment.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-65
 8. Push forward on the front edge (A) of the 9. Then move the top rearward to its fully-stored
convertible top to allow the rear edge (B) of the position.
convertible top to be moved to its full-down position. 10. After the top is stored, apply one even push on the
center of the front edge (A) of the convertible top to
assure that the top is fully retracted.
11. Close the tonneau cover (B) by pressing down on it
with a swift, firm motion.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-66
Raising the Manual Convertible Top
1. Park on a level surface. Shift an automatic
transmission into P (Park) and set the parking
brake. Shift a manual transmission into N (Neutral)
and set the parking brake.
2. Lower both windows.
3. Make sure the ignition is off.
4. Tilt the driver’s seat forward and press the tonneau
cover release button, or use the manual release
cable if battery power has been lost. See Step 6
under “Lowering the Manual Convertible Top” earlier
in this section.
After pressing the release button, the driver’s
and passenger’s door glass should retract to
the full-down position, if they have not already 6. Pull the convertible top up by firmly gripping the
been lowered. front edge (A) near the center and applying a
brisk upward and forward motion to get the top in
5. Lift the tonneau cover. the full-up position.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-67
 10. Push the front edge (A) of the convertible top down
from the outside of the vehicle, or pull the front
edge (A) of the convertible top down from the center
pull-down handle located in the inside of the vehicle.

7. Lift the rear edge (B) of the convertible top to its

full-up position by first raising the front edge (A).
8. Close the tonneau cover (C) by pushing it down
with a swift, firm motion.
9. Lower the rear edge (B) of the convertible top by 11. Pull the top front latch handle down and turn it
first slightly pushing the front edge (A) of the counterclockwise to lock the convertible top.
convertible top forward.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-68
Convertible Top (Power) Notice: If you lower the top on your vehicle in cold
weather (0°F/-18°C or lower), you may damage top
For care and cleaning of the convertible top see components. Do not lower the top in cold weather.
Convertible Top on page 5-98 under “Service and
Notice: If you raise or lower the convertible top
Appearance Care”. High pressure car washes may
while the vehicle is in motion, you could damage the
cause water to enter the vehicle.
top or the top mechanism. The repairs would not
To operate the power convertible top use the following be covered by your warranty. Always put an
steps. automatic transmission in (P) Park or a manual
transmission in (N) Neutral before raising or
Notice: Leaving the convertible top down and
lowering the convertible top.
exposing the interior of your vehicle to outdoor
conditions may cause damage. Always close Lowering the Power Convertible Top
the convertible top if leaving your vehicle outdoors.
1. Park on a level surface. Start the engine. Shift an
Notice: Lowering the convertible top when there automatic transmission into P (Park) and set the
are objects in the storage area could damage parking brake. Shift a manual transmission
it or break the glass rear window. Always verify that into N (Neutral), and set the parking brake.
no objects are in the storage area before lowering
2. Make sure the trunk is closed and the rear trunk
the convertible top.
partition in the rear storage area is in the fastened
Notice: Lowering the top if it is damp, wet, or dirty upright position, and that no objects are forward
can cause stains, mildew, and damage to the inside of the divider. See “Rear Trunk Partition” under
of your vehicle. Dry off the top before lowering it. Rear Storage Area on page 2-53.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-69
 4. Push and hold the
bottom of the power
convertible top button,
located to the left of the
steering wheel, on the
instrument panel.

The windows will automatically lower and the convertible

top will lower into the rear of the vehicle. A chime will
sound when the convertible top has lowered completely.
If the radio is on the sound may be muted for a brief time
3. Release the convertible top front latch, located due to a new audio system equalization being loaded.
above the inside rearview mirror, by pulling and
turning it clockwise toward the driver’s door. Push If the convertible top is operated multiple times, the
upward on the front edge. The windows will engine should be running to prevent drain on the
automatically lower. vehicle’s battery. Under certain conditions, the Driver
Information Center (DIC) may display a message
regarding the power convertible top. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-56 for more information.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-70
Raising the Power Convertible Top 2. Make sure the trunk lid is closed and the rear trunk
partition in the rear storage area is in the fastened
Notice: If you raise or lower the convertible top upright position, and that no objects are forward
while the vehicle is in motion, you could damage the of the divider. See “Rear Trunk Partition” under
top or the top mechanism. The repairs would not Rear Storage Area on page 2-53.
be covered by your warranty. Always put an
automatic transmission in (P) Park or a manual 3. Push and hold the top of the power convertible top
transmission in (N) Neutral before raising or button. The top will raise and the windows will lower
lowering the convertible top. if they were in the raised position. A chime will
sound when the top is raised completely.
1. Park on a level surface. Start the engine. Shift an 4. After the convertible top is completely raised,
automatic transmission into P (Park) and set the release the power convertible top button.
parking brake. Shift a manual transmission
into N (Neutral) and set the parking brake. 5. Pull the convertible front top latch down and turn it
counterclockwise to lock the convertible top.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-71
 completely stowed, with the top down and the tonneau
latched, or closed, with the front top latch locked in place,
at the time the convertible top button was released.

If the radio is on the sound may be muted for a brief

time due to a new audio system equalization being
loaded.
1. Open the tonneau cover by pulling the emergency
If the vehicle has lost power, the convertible top can still
release cable.
be raised by releasing pressure on the hydraulic pump,
located under the passenger’s side of the tonneau cover, The tonneau cover emergency release cable is
by using the following steps. The carpet liner on the located behind the passenger’s seat head restraint,
passenger’s side must be pulled back to access the on the underside forward edge of the tonneau
hydraulic pump. cover. Also, see Hatch on page 2-14 for information
on the emergency trunk release handle.
Manual operation of the power convertible top cannot Be careful when opening the tonneau cover by hand.
be attempted for five minutes from the last time the If the tonneau cover is opened quickly, damage can
convertible top button was pressed if the top is not occur to the hinging mechanism, which can prevent
proper operation of the convertible top.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-72
 When power is restored to the vehicle, the hydraulic bolt
must be tightened, by turning it clockwise. The power
convertible top button can then be used to lower or raise
the convertible top.
If the power convertible top is operated multiple times,
the engine should be running to prevent drain on the
vehicle’s battery. Under certain conditions, the Driver
Information Center (DIC) may display a message
regarding the power top. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-56 for more information.
If the battery has been disconnected, the power
windows must be initialized for the power top to operate.
See Power Windows on page 2-17 for more information.

2. Locate the pressure release bolt on the front side of

the hydraulic pump.
3. Use the wrench, located in the console, and turn
the pressure release bolt counterclockwise one
revolution, to relieve pressure to the hydraulic
pump. This will allow you to manually raise the
convertible top.
4. Then follow the steps under raising the manual
convertible top. See “Convertible Top (Manual)”
under Convertible Top (Manual) on page 2-62
or Convertible Top (Power) on page 2-69

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-73
✍ NOTES

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-74
 Section 3 Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4 Climate Controls ............................................3-25
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6 Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-25
Horn .............................................................3-6 Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-30
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6 Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-31
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7 Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-32
Turn and Lane-Change Signals (Auto Signal) .....3-8 Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-33
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8 Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-35
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8 Tachometer .................................................3-35
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9 Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-35
Windshield Washer .......................................3-10 Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-36
Cruise Control ..............................................3-10 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-37
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-14 Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-38
Wiper Activated Headlamps ............................3-15 One-to-Four Shift Light
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-15 (Manual Transmission) ...............................3-39
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-16 Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-40
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-17 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light .....3-41
Twilight Sentinel® ..........................................3-17 Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light ....3-41
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ........................3-18 Active Handling System Light .........................3-42
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-19 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-43
Courtesy Lamps ...........................................3-19 Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-43
Entry/Exit Lighting .........................................3-19 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-44
Reading Lamps ............................................3-19 Engine Oil Pressure Gage .............................3-47
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-19 Security Light ...............................................3-48
Head-Up Display (HUD) .................................3-20 Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-48
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-24 Lights On Reminder ......................................3-48
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-25

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-1
 Section 3 Instrument Panel
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-48 Using an MP3 ..............................................3-94
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-49 XM Radio Messages .....................................3-96
Boost Gage (ZR1 Only) .................................3-50 Navigation/Radio System ...............................3-97
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-50 Bluetooth® ...................................................3-97
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-50 Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-107
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-56 Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-108
Other Messages ...........................................3-72 Radio Reception .........................................3-109
DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-73 Diversity Antenna System .............................3-110
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............3-110
Audio System(s) .............................................3-82
Setting the Clock ..........................................3-82
Radio(s) ......................................................3-83

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-2
✍ NOTES

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-4
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
A. Outlet Adjustment on page 3-30. O. Bluetooth® on page 3-97 (If Equipped). Audio
B. Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 3-20 (If Equipped). Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-108
(If Equipped).
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
Cruise Control on page 3-10. Fog Lamps on P. Tilt Wheel on page 3-6.
page 3-17. Exterior Lamps on page 3-14. Q. Horn on page 3-6.
D. Manual Shift Paddles (If Equipped). See Automatic R. Telescopic Wheel Button (If Equipped).
Transmission Operation on page 2-26. See Tilt Wheel on page 3-6.
E. Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-50. S. Ignition Positions on page 2-23.
F. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3-33. T. Heated Seats on page 1-4 (If Equipped).
G. Windshield Wipers on page 3-9 and Windshield U. Shift Lever (Automatic Shown). See Automatic
Washer on page 3-10. Transmission Operation on page 2-26 or Manual
H. DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-50. Transmission Operation on page 2-30.
I. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6. V. Active Handling System on page 4-7.
J. Audio System(s) on page 3-82. W. Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 3-24.
K. Dual Automatic Climate Control System on X. Selective Ride Control on page 4-9.
page 3-25. Y. Cupholders on page 2-52.
L. Fuel Door Release Button. See Filling the Tank on Z. Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter on page 3-25.
page 5-8. Hatch/Trunk Release Button. See “Hatch/ AA. Parking Brake on page 2-32.
Trunk Lid Release” under Hatch on page 2-14.
AB. Glove Box on page 2-52.
M. Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-19.
AC. Instrument Panel Fuse Block on page 5-103.
N. Power Folding Top Switch (If Equipped).
See Convertible Top (Manual) on page 2-62
or Convertible Top (Power) on page 2-69.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
The hazard warning flashers warns others that you have
a problem. The button is located near the center of
the instrument panel.

|: Press to make the front and rear turn signal lamps

flash on and off. Press again to turn the flashers off.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what mode
the ignition is in, even if the ignition is turned off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn
signals will not work.

Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
Tilt Wheel lever toward you. Then move the wheel to a comfortable
position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise it to the highest level
to give your legs more room when you exit and enter
the vehicle.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-6
Telescopic Steering Column Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
If your vehicle has this feature, the telescopic steering
column will allow you to adjust the distance the steering
wheel is from the instrument panel.

The telescopic steering

column switch is located on
the right side of the steering
column.

The lever on the left side of the steering column

includes the following:

G: Turn and Lane-Change Signals

3: Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

To operate the telescopic steering column, push the
switch forward and the wheel will move away from you. #: Fog Lamps
Pull the switch rearward and the wheel will move
toward you I: Cruise Control
The telescopic steering column position can be stored P: Exterior Lamps Control
with your memory settings. See Memory Seat, Mirrors
and Steering Wheel on page 1-4 for more information. • Flash-to-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass on
page 3-8.
Information for these features is on the pages following.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals Turn Signal on Chime
(Auto Signal) A chime sounds if the turn signal has been on for more
than three-quarters of a mile (1.2 km) of driving.
An arrow on the instrument If you need to leave the turn signal on for more than
panel cluster flashes in the three-quarters of a mile (1.2 km), turn off the signal and
direction of the turn or then turn it back on.
lane change.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high,
push the turn signal lever all the way forward. To change
from high to low beam, pull the lever rearward.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal
a turn. While the high beams
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash are on, this light on the
to signal a lane change. Release the lever and the instrument panel cluster
turn signal automatically flashes three times. If more will also be lit.
flashes are desired, continue to hold the lever.
The lever returns to its starting position when it is
released.
If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrows flash
rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb may be Flash-to-Pass
burned out.
To use the flash-to-pass feature, briefly pull the turn
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out, signal lever toward you. The high-beam indicator flashes
check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on to indicate to the other driver that you intend to pass.
page 5-103. If the low-beam headlamps are off and the fog lamps
are on, the fog lamps flash.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-8
Windshield Wipers x (Delay Adjustment): Use for a delayed wiping
cycle. Turn the intermittent adjust band down for a longer
delay or up for a shorter delay. The wiper speed can only
be manually adjusted when the lever is in this position.

9 (Off): Turns off the windshield wipers.

8 (Mist): Move all the way down to mist and release

for a single wiping cycle. The windshield wipers will
stop after one wipe. Hold the band on mist longer for
more wipes.
The windshield wiper lever is located on the right side of
the steering column. Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers. If this
Move the lever to the following positions: occurs, a circuit breaker will stop the wipers until the
motor cools. Clear all ice and snow from the windshield
1 (High Speed): For steady wiping at high speed. wiper blades before using them. If the wiper blades
are frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen them
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed. or warm the windshield before turning the wipers on.
If they become worn or damaged, get new blades
& (Delay): Use to set a delay between wipes. or blade inserts.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-9
Windshield Washer Cruise Control
The lever on the right side of the steering column also With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
controls the windshield washer. There is a button at the or more can be maintained without keeping your foot
end of the lever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work
press the button and hold it. The washer will spray until at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
you release the button. The wipers will continue to clear Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set,
the window for about six seconds after the button is
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
released and then stop or return to your preset speed.

{ CAUTION: { CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use the
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision. Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.
On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
If the fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low, control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
the message CHECK WASHER FLUID will appear on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) display. It will take
15 seconds after the bottle is refilled for this message to If the vehicle is in cruise control, and has the Traction
turn off. For information on the correct washer fluid to Control System (TCS), and it begins to limit wheel spin,
use, see Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-42 and the cruise control automatically disengages. See Traction
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12. Control System (TCS) on page 4-6. When road
conditions allow the cruise control to be safely
used again, it can be turned back on.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-10
 The vehicle has cruise Setting Cruise Control
control.

{ CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into
cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
9 (Off): Turns the system off.

R (On): Turns the system on. 1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed desired.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Use to make the vehicle
accelerate or resume a previously set speed. 3. Press T at the end of the lever and release it.
T (Set): Press this button at the end of the lever to 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
set the speed. When the cruise control is engaged, the CRUISE SET
TO XX MPH message displays on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Other Messages on page 3-72.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-11
Resuming a Set Speed Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then Control
the brakes are applied, the cruise control is disengaged. There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
But it does not need to be reset.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
Once the vehicle is going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
speed. Press J at the end of the lever, then
more, you can move the cruise control switch briefly
release the button and the accelerator pedal.
from R to S . The vehicle now cruises at the higher speed.
The vehicles goes back up to your chosen speed and If the accelerator pedal is held longer than
stays there. 60 seconds, cruise control will turn off.
If the switch is held at resume/accelerate the vehicle • Move the cruise switch from R to S . Hold it there
keeps going faster until the switch is released or the until desired speed is reached, and then release
brake is applied. Do not hold the switch at resume/ the switch. To increase the vehicle speed in small
accelerate, unless you want the vehicle to go faster. amounts, move the switch briefly to S . Each
time this is done, the vehicle goes about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
• Press and hold the set button until the lower speed
desired is reached, then release it.
• To slow down in small amounts, briefly press J .
Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-12
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control in Sport and Manual Paddle
Cruise Control Shift Gear Selection
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s When the vehicle is in S (Sport) and the manual paddle
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the shift controls are not being used, cruise control
vehicle slows down to the cruise control speed set operates in the same manner as D (Drive).
earlier. When the vehicle is in S (Sport) and the manual paddle
Using Cruise Control on Hills shift controls are being used, cruise control operates
as follows:
How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon
the vehicle’s speed, load, and the steepness of the hills. • If cruise control is active and a gear is selected with
When going up steep hills, you might want to step on the the manual paddle shift controls, the vehicle speed
accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed. When is maintained in the driver selected gear and will not
going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a lower automatically up-shift or down-shift the transmission
gear to keep the vehicle’s speed down. When the brakes while the driver’s gear selection is active.
are applied the cruise control turns off. • If driving in hilly terrain, cruise control may not
be able to maintain vehicle speed if an up-shift
or down-shift is not selected by the driver. While
driving on hilly terrain and cruise control is active
with a manual paddle shift gear selection, the driver
must select the proper gear for the terrain or select
D (Drive) on the gear range selector for full automatic
transmission operation.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-13
Ending Cruise Control Exterior Lamps
To end a cruise control session, step lightly on the
brake pedal. If the vehicle has a manual transmission,
lightly tapping the clutch will also end a cruise control
session.
Move the cruise control switch to 9 to turn the system
completely off.
When cruise control is disengaged, the CRUISE
DISENGAGED message displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-56. The exterior lamp control is located to the left of the
steering wheel on the multifunction lever.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the band with this
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off. symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp band has four positions:

O (Off): Turns off all lamps.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-14
AUTO (Automatic): Sets the exterior lamps to Wiper Activated Headlamps
automatic mode. AUTO mode turns the exterior lamps
on and off depending on how much light is available This feature activates the headlamps and parking
outside the vehicle. lamps after the windshield wipers have been in use for
approximately 15 seconds and deactivates and returns to
To override AUTO mode, turn the control to off. ambient lighting conditions 15 seconds after the wipers
To reset to AUTO mode turn the control to exterior are turned off.
lamps and then back to AUTO. Automatic mode also If the exterior lamp control has been turned off or is
resets when the vehicle is turned off and then back in the parking lamp position while the wiper control is
on again if the control is left in the AUTO position. active in any position, the HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED
message appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
; (Parking Lamp): Turns on the parking lamps See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56.
together with the following:
When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activated
• Sidemarker Lamps headlamps will immediately turn off.
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps Headlamps on Reminder
• Instrument Panel Lights A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control
The parking brake indicator light comes on and stays is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position
on when the parking lamps are on with the engine and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.
off and the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

5 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, together

with the previously listed lamps and lights.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-15
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) vehicle leaves the garage, it takes approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay, the
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual.
Fully functional daytime running lamps are required Make sure the instrument panel brightness knob is in the
on all vehicles first sold in Canada. full bright position. See Instrument Panel Brightness on
page 3-19 for more information.
The DRL system makes the front turn signal lamps
come on when the following conditions are met: If it is dark enough outside and the exterior lamp control
is off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will
• It is still daylight and the ignition is on. display on the Driver’s Information Center (DIC).
• The exterior lamp control is in the AUTO position. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56.
• The transmission is not in P (Park) or the parking Turning the exterior lamp control to off a second
brake is off. time, or turning on the headlamps will remove the
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message in the DIC.
• The parking brake is off or the vehicle speed is If the parking lamps or the fog lamps were turned on
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h). instead, the HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message
When DRL are on, only the front turn signal lamps will will continue to be displayed.
be on. The parking lamps, taillamps, instrument panel The regular headlamp system should be turned on
lights, or other exterior lamps will not be on when the when needed.
DRL are being used.
To turn off the DRL, turn the exterior lamp control to
When it is dark enough outside, the front turn signal the off position or shift into P (Park). The DRL will stay off
lamps turn off and the normal low-beam headlamps until the control is toggled again or the vehicle is shifted
turn on. out of P (Park).
When it is bright enough outside, the regular lamps This procedure applies only to vehicles first sold in the
go off, and the front turn signal lamps will take over. United States.
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system comes on immediately. Once the

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-16
Fog Lamps Twilight Sentinel®
Use fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty Twilight Sentinel® can turn the lamps on and off for you.
conditions. A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes
the Twilight Sentinel® work, so be sure it is not covered.
The fog lamps control is located on the multifunction
lever next to the exterior lamp control. With Twilight Sentinel®, the following will happen:

# (Fog Lamps): Turning the band to this position will

• When it is dark enough outside, the front turn signal
lamps (DRL) will go off, and the headlamps and
turn the fog lamps on.
parking lamps will come on. The other lamps that
When you turn the fog lamps on, the fog lamp light will come on with headlamps will also come on.
appear on the instrument panel cluster to indicate that the
fog lamps and the parking lamps are on.
• When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps
will go off, and the front turn signal lamps (DRL) will
If you turn the high-beam headlamps on, the fog lamps come on, as long as the exterior lamp switch is in the
will turn off. They will turn on again when you switch AUTO position.
to low-beam headlamps.
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to operate. headlamp system come on immediately. Once the
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to vehicle leaves the garage, it takes about one minute
be on along with the fog lamps. for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL
if it is light outside. During that delay, the instrument
panel cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure
the instrument panel brightness control is in full bright
position. See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-19.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-17
You can idle the vehicle with the lamps off, even when If you turn off the ignition with the exterior lamp switch
it is dark outside. in the parking lamp or headlamp position, the Twilight
Sentinel® delay will not occur. The lamps will turn off
After starting the vehicle, turn the exterior lamp
control band on the multifunction lever to off and then as soon as the switch is turned off.
release it. The lamps will remain off until the control The regular headlamp system should be turned on
band is turned to off again. when needed.
Twilight Sentinel® also provides exterior illumination as
you leave the vehicle. If Twilight Sentinel® has turned Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
on the lamps when you turn off the ignition, the
lamps will remain on until: If the manual parking lamps or headlamps have been
left on, the exterior lamps will turn off as soon as the
• The exterior lamp switch is moved from off to the ignition is turned off or Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
parking lamp position, or is active. This protects against draining the battery
• A delay time that you select has elapsed. in case you have accidentally left the headlamps or
parking lamps on. The battery saver does not work
See “Personal Options” under DIC Vehicle if the headlamps are turned on after the ignition switch
Personalization on page 3-73 to select the delay time is turned to off.
that you want. You can also select no delay time.
If you need to leave the lamps on, use the exterior lamp
control to turn the lamps back on.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-18
Instrument Panel Brightness Entry/Exit Lighting
With entry lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
The knob for this feature is
entering the vehicle. The interior lamps will come on
located on the left side of
for about 20 seconds when the engine is off.
the instrument panel.
You can turn exit and entry lighting off by quickly turning
the courtesy lamps on and off.

Reading Lamps
Push the knob in to turn on the interior lights. The inside rearview mirror includes two reading lamps.
The lamps will go on when a door is opened. When the
Turn and hold the knob clockwise to brighten the lights doors are closed, press each lamp switch to turn them
or counterclockwise to dim them. During the day, this on individually.
knob will adjust the instrument panel brightness and
at night will adjust all interior lighting.
Battery Run-Down Protection
Be sure not to have this knob turned all the way
down with the lamps on during the day. Your Driver This vehicle has a feature to help prevent the battery
Information Center (DIC) may not be visible. from being drained in case any of the following lamps
are left on; the underhood lamp, if your vehicle has this
Courtesy Lamps feature, vanity mirror lamps, cargo lamps, reading lamps,
console or glove box lamps. If any of these lamps
When any door or the hatch/trunk lid is opened, the are left on, they will automatically time-out after about
interior lamps will go on unless it is bright outside. 10 minutes. To reset it, all of the above lamps must
You can also turn the courtesy lamps on and off be turned off or the ignition key on.
by pressing the instrument panel brightness knob.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-19
Head-Up Display (HUD) • Shift Light
This light is used for performance driving to indicate
that the vehicle’s best performance level has been
{ CAUTION: reached to shift the transmission into the next higher
gear. An arrow pointing up will light up on the display
just prior to reaching the engine fuel cut-off mode.
If the HUD image is too bright, or too high in your
This cut-off is about 6,500 RPM for the LS3 engine,
field of view, it may take you more time to see
6,600 RPM for the LS9 & ZR1 engines and
things you need to see when it is dark outside. 7,000 RPM for the LS7 engine.
Be sure to keep the HUD image dim and placed
low in your field of view. • Check Gages Warning
• Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
For vehicles with the Head-Up Display (HUD), you can • Transmission Fluid Temperature Gage, (Automatic
see some of the driver information that appears on Transmission Vehicles Only)
the instrument panel cluster.
The information may be displayed in English or metric
• Engine Oil Temperature Gage
units and appears as an image focused out toward • Engine Oil Pressure Gage
the front of the vehicle. The HUD consists of the
following information: • G-Force Gage
• Speedometer • Boost Gage (If Equipped)
• Turn Signal Indicators • Audio Functions, Street Mode Only
• High-Beam Indicator Symbol • Navigation, Only with Navigation Radio,
• Tachometer Turn-by-Turn Guidance
• Manual Paddle Shift Gear Indicator (If Equipped)
These displays on the HUD are for use when
using the manual paddle shift controls to shift the
transmission. See “Manual Paddle Shift” in Automatic
Transmission Operation on page 2-26.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-20
There are three HUD modes that can be viewed in When the desired HUD display has been selected,
the HUD display. Press the MODE button to scroll release the MODE button.
through these modes in the following order: Within each mode, the display, can be further
customized by pressing the PAGE button. Pressing this
Street Mode supports
button in each mode will turn off and on the following:
audio and navigation
functions with your choice • Street Mode — No tachometer, circular tachometer,
of tachometer settings. and linear tachometer.
• Track Modes 1 and 2 — No minor gage, coolant
temperature, transmission oil temperature, engine oil
temperature, engine oil pressure, and boost gage.
While in Track Mode 1 or 2, the maximum G value
Track Mode 1 supports the achieved during the current ignition cycle can be
G-Force gage and minor displayed by pressing and holding the PAGE button.
gages with a circular The maximum G display will be shown until the PAGE
tachometer. button is released. The maximum G value display will
be identical to the normal G value display, except the
maximum G gage digits ([Link] G) and corresponding
G gage bar will overwrite the current G value.

Track Mode 2 supports

G-Force gages, boost
gage w/ZR1, and minor
gages with a linear
tachometer.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-21
 The HUD controls are
located to the left of the
steering wheel.

Be sure to continue scanning the displays, controls

and driving environment just as you would in a vehicle
without HUD. If you never look at the instrument panel To adjust the HUD so it can be seen properly, do the
cluster, you may miss something important, such as a following:
warning light. Under important warning conditions, the 1. Start the engine and press the HUD dimmer control
CHECK GAGES warning will illuminate in the HUD. all the way up by pressing the (+) button.
View your Driver Information Center (DIC) for more
information. The brightness of the HUD image is determined
by the light conditions in the direction the vehicle is
facing and where you have the HUD dimmer control
set. If you are facing a dark object or a heavily
shaded area, the HUD may anticipate that you
are entering a dark area and may begin to dim.
It is possible for sunlight to enter the HUD making
it difficult to see the image. The display will return
to normal when the sunlight is no longer entering
the HUD.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-22
 2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable driving position. Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove
If your seat position changes, the HUD may need any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity
to be re-adjusted. of the HUD image.
3. Press the up or down arrows to center the HUD To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaner on a
image in your view. soft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry
The HUD image can only be adjusted up and down, it. Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens because
not side-to-side. the cleaner could leak into the unit.
4. Press the dimmer control downward until the HUD If the ignition is on and the HUD image cannot be seen,
image is no brighter than necessary. check to see if:
To turn HUD off, press and hold the (–) button until the • Something is covering the HUD unit.
HUD display turns off. • The HUD dimmer control is adjusted properly.
If the sun comes out or it becomes cloudy, the HUD • The HUD image is adjusted to the proper height.
brightness may need to be adjusted again using
the dimmer control. Polarized sunglasses could • Ambient light is low, in the direction the vehicle
make the HUD image harder to see. is facing.
The HUD information can be displayed in one of • A fuse is blown. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
six languages including English, Spanish, French, page 5-103.
German, Italian or Japanese. The speedometer can Keep in mind that the windshield is part of the HUD
be displayed in either English or Metric units. system. See Windshield Replacement on page 5-59.
To change the language and unit selections, see
“OPTION” under DIC Operation and Displays on
page 3-50.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-23
Accessory Power Outlet(s) Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
The accessory power outlet can be used to connect from working as they should. The repairs would
electrical equipment, such as a cellular phone. not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating
The accessory power outlet is located inside the center
of 20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
console storage compartment, on the forward left side.
adding electrical equipment.
To use the outlet, remove the tethered cap. When not
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
using it, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
installation instructions included with the equipment.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in We recommend that you see a qualified technician or
for an extended period of time while the vehicle is your dealer/retailer for the proper installation of your
off will drain the battery. Power is always supplied equipment.
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating. damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
plug because the power outlets are designed for
with the accessory power outlet and could result in blown
accessory power plugs only.
vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem,
see your dealer/retailer for additional information on
accessory power outlets.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-24
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter Climate Controls
The ashtray and cigarette lighter are located on the
instrument panel, in front of the shift lever. To use the Dual Automatic Climate Control
ashtray, press on the indentation at the top of the door.
System
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items
are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other With this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly can be controlled.
damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items
in the ashtray.
Loose objects, such as paper clips, can lodge behind
and beneath the ashtray lid and prevent movement
of the lid. You should avoid putting small, loose objects
near the ashtray.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way and let
go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating does not let the lighter back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating A. Driver Temperature F. Air Conditioning
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold Controls G. Fan Control
a cigarette lighter in while it is heating. B. Display H. Air Delivery Mode
C. Passenger Control
Temperature Control I. Defrost
D. AUTO J. Rear Window
E. Recirculation Defogger

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-25
When the vehicle is first started, the display shows the The AUTO control system works best with the windows
driver’s temperature setting, the outside temperature, up and the removable roof installed or the convertible
the fan speed and the air delivery, for about 10 seconds. top up.
The outside temperature is shown in the center of 1. Press the AUTO button.
the display. The digital display will show the readings 2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting
in Fahrenheit or Celsius. See “Personal Options” between 60°F (16°C) and 90°F (32°C). Choosing
under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-73 the coldest or warmest temperature setting will
for information on changing your display. not cause the system to heat or cool any faster.
Automatic Operation A setting of 73°F (23°C) is suggested.
In cold weather, the system will start at reduced
AUTO (Automatic): Press the AUTO button to place fan speeds to avoid blowing cold air into your vehicle
the entire system in the automatic mode. When automatic until warmer air is available. The system starts out
operation is active, the system automatically controls the blowing air at the floor but may change modes
inside temperature, the air delivery mode, and the fan automatically as the vehicle warms up to maintain
speed. the chosen temperature setting. The length of time
After a ten second display of the current settings, needed for warm up depends on the outside
the word AUTO, the driver’s temperature setting and temperature and the length of time that has
the outside temperature will be shown. The system elapsed since the vehicle was last driven.
operates to reach the set temperature as quickly 3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from
as possible. 10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature, if
necessary.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of
the instrument panel, near the windshield. For more
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensor” later in
this section.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-26
Manual Operation N (Air Delivery Mode Control): Press this button to
manually lock in the current air delivery setting and to
Driver Power/Temperature: Press the driver
temperature knob to turn the climate control system off. stop the automatic mode control. Pressing N deletes
This is the only setting that completely shuts off the fan. AUTO from the digital display and the mode graphics
The digital display shows only the outside temperature. will be shown. To change the setting, press N again.
The driver and the passenger set temperature and the The AUTO button must be pressed to return to the
air intake mode can still be adjusted when the climate automatic mode selection.
control is off.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
Passenger Power/Temperature: Press the passenger
temperature knob to turn the passenger’s climate control H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
system on or off. Turn the knob to increase or decrease outlets, with some air directed to the floor outlets.
the temperature for the passenger. If the passenger’s
climate control system is off, the driver’s temperature % (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
knob will control the temperature for the entire vehicle. panel and floor outlets.

x 9 w (Fan): Press to increase or decrease the fan 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with
speed. The fan speed setting will appear in the display. some air directed to the windshield and side window
defogger outlets.
Pressing the arrows will delete AUTO from the digital
display. The fan graphics with the fan speed bars will be - (Floor/Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog
shown. The AUTO button must be pressed to return to or moisture. Air is directed to the windshield and the floor
the automatic fan control. outlets, with a small amount to the side window outlets.
If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at the In this mode, the system automatically turns off the
highest setting, the passenger compartment air filter recirculation and runs the air-conditioning compressor
may need to be replaced. For more information, see unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-31 and The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the
Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4. defog mode.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-27
1 (Defrost): This mode clears the windows of fog You may notice a slight change in engine performance
or frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield, when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and
with a small amount directed to the side window outlets. turns on again. This is normal. The system is designed
The indicator light comes on and the digital display will to make adjustments to help with fuel economy while
show the defrost mode symbol and fan speed when still maintaining the selected temperature.
the front defrost mode is being used. In this mode, the On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
system automatically turns off the recirculation and runs escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
the air-conditioning compressor, unless the outside it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
temperature is at or below freezing. Recirculation cannot system to operate more efficiently.
be selected while in the defrost mode. Pressing 1 again For quick cool down on hot days press the AUTO button
will return the system to the last operating mode. and adjust the temperature to a cool, comfortable setting.
For severe ice conditions, turn the driver’s temperature To achieve maximum cool down, do the following:
knob to 90°F (32°C) while in defrost mode. 1. Select H mode.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear. 2. Press ? .
^ (Air Conditioning Off): Press to turn the air 3. Select the a/c on.
conditioning compressor off. Press AUTO to return to 4. Select the coolest temperature.
automatic operation. When in AUTO, the air conditioning
compressor comes on automatically, as needed. 5. Select the highest fan speed.

Air conditioning does not operate at temperatures Using these settings together for long periods of time
below about 35°F to 40°F (2°C to 4°C). In temperatures may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too
above 40°F (4°C), the air conditioning cannot be dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in
turned off in defrost and defog, as it helps to remove the vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
moisture from the vehicle. It also helps to keep the The air conditioning system removes moisture from
windows clear. the air, so a small amount of water might drip under
the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-28
? (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation There is also a sensor located behind the front bumper.
mode on or off. An indicator light comes on to show This sensor reads the outside air temperature and
that recirculation is on. This mode prevents outside air helps to maintain the temperature inside the vehicle.
from entering your vehicle. It can be used to prevent Any cover on the front of the vehicle could give a
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle and false reading in the temperature.
to help cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly. If the outside temperature goes up, the displayed
Recirculation mode is not available in defrost or temperature will not change until:
defog mode.
• The vehicle’s speed is above 12 mph (19 km/h) for
Sensors five minutes.

The solar sensor on the vehicle monitors the solar • The vehicle’s speed is above 32 mph (52 km/h) for
heat and uses the information to maintain the selected two and a half minutes.
temperature when operating in AUTO mode by These delays prevent false readings. If the temperature
automatically adjusting the temperature, fan speed goes down, the outside temperature will be shown
and air delivery system. The system may also supply when you start the vehicle. If it has been turned off for
cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. less than three hours, the temperature will be recalled
The recirculation mode will also be activated, as from the previous vehicle operation.
necessary. Do not cover the solar sensor located
on the top of the instrument panel near the windshield There is also an inside temperature sensor located to
or the system will not work properly. the left of the ignition switch. The automatic climate
control system uses this sensor to receive information,
so if you block or cover it, the system will not function
properly.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-29
Rear Window Defogger Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside
of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to damage the warming grid, and the repairs would
remove fog or frost from the rear window. not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not
The rear window defogger only works when the engine attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal
is running. or anything similar to the defogger grid.

= (Rear Window Defogger): Press to turn the rear Outlet Adjustment

window defogger on or off. Be sure to clear as much
snow from the rear window as possible. An indicator light Use the tab located on the air outlets to change the
comes on to show that the rear window defogger is on. direction of the airflow.
The rear window defogger turns off about 10 minutes Operation Tips
after the button is pressed when traveling less than
30 mph (48 km/h). If turned on again, the defogger • Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
only runs for about five minutes before turning off. inlets at the base of the windshield that may
The defogger can also be turned off by turning off block the flow of air into your vehicle.
the engine. • Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
The vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors. adversely affect the performance of the system.
The mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the • Keep the area around the base of the instrument
surface of the mirrors when the rear window defogger panel console and air path under the seats clear
button is pressed. of objects to help circulate the air inside of
For vehicles with a power convertible top, the rear your vehicle more effectively.
window defogger and heated mirrors are automatically
disabled when the power convertible top is moving
or down.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-30
Passenger Compartment Air Filter To check or replace the air filter:

The passenger compartment air filter removes certain

particles from the air including pollen and dust particles.
Reductions in airflow, which may occur more often in
dusty areas, indicate that the filter may need to be
replaced. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for information on how often to replace the filter.
Notice: Driving without a passenger compartment
air filter in place can cause water and small particles,
like paper and leaves, to be pulled into your climate
control system which may cause damage to it. Make
sure you always replace the old filter with a new one.
The passenger compartment air filter is located on 1. Remove the cover retainer clips (A) from the
the passenger side of the engine compartment near passenger compartment air filter cover.
the battery. See Engine Compartment Overview 2. Remove the cover.
on page 5-14.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-31
 Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is
started to indicate they are working.
3. Remove the filter and install the new air filter. Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
4. Replace the filter cover. with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to indicate a problem with
5. Attach the retainer clips.
the vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there may
be a problem, check the section that explains what to do.
Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly and even dangerous.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-32
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster and Driver Information Center (DIC) are designed to show how the vehicle is running.
It shows how fast the vehicle is going, about how much fuel the vehicle has left and many other things needed
to know to drive safely and economically.

United States Manual Transmission shown, Canada, Automatic Transmission and Z06 Model similar

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-33
 ZR1– United States shown Canada similar

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-34
Speedometer and Odometer Safety Belt Reminders
The speedometer shows the speed in either miles per Safety Belt Reminder Light
hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). For more
information see “Personal Options” under DIC Vehicle When the engine is started, a chime comes on for
Personalization on page 3-73. several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety
To read the odometer with the ignition off, turn on the belts, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
parking lamps.
The safety belt light also
If the vehicle needs a new odometer installed, the comes on and stay on for
mileage total of the new odometer will be set to the several seconds, then
original miles (kilometers) of the old odometer. See your it flashes for several more.
dealer/retailer if the odometer must be replaced in the
vehicle.

Tachometer
This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains
The tachometer displays the engine speed in thousands unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
of revolutions per minute (rpm). safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor
Notice: Fuel shuts off at about 6500 rpm for the the light comes on.
base model, 7000 rpm for the Z06 model, and
6600 rpm for the ZR1 model. If the vehicle continues
to be driven at the fuel shut off rpm, the engine
could be damaged. Be sure to operate the vehicle
below the fuel shut off rpm or reduce the vehicle’s
rpm quickly when the fuel shuts off.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-35
Airbag Readiness Light
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for { CAUTION:
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check includes If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. means the airbag system might not be working
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
System on page 1-44.
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
The airbag readiness light without a crash. To help avoid injury, have
flashes for a few seconds the vehicle serviced right away.
when the engine is started.
If the light does not come
on then, have it fixed If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
immediately. Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come
on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56
for more information.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-36
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and
The vehicle has the passenger sensing system. off, for several seconds as a system check. Then, after
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-51 for several more seconds, the status indicator will light either
important safety information. The rearview mirror ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol, to let you know
has a passenger airbag status indicator. the status to let you know the status of the right front
passenger frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags
(if equipped).
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped) are enabled (may inflate).
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger
United States airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped). See Passenger Sensing System on
page 1-51 for more on this, including important safety
information.

Canada

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-37
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights Voltmeter Gage
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
The voltmeter shows the
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
voltage output of the
battery. It shows the
voltage output of the
{ CAUTION: charging system while
the engine is running.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-36
for more information, including important safety Base and Z06
information.
The reading changes as the rate of charge changes
(with engine speed, for example), but if the voltmeter
reads at 9 volts or below, the instrument panel cluster
and other systems may shut down. The Driver
Information Center (DIC) reads BATTERY VOLTAGE
LOW when the vehicle is at 10 volts or below. Have it
checked right away. Driving with the voltmeter reading
at 10 volts or below could drain the battery and disable
the vehicle.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-38
One-to-Four Shift Light After shifting to 4 (Fourth), the vehicle can be
downshifted to a lower gear.
(Manual Transmission)
Notice: Forcing the shift lever into any gear except
4 (Fourth) when the 1 TO 4 SHIFT light comes on
When this light comes on,
may damage the transmission. Shift only from
the vehicle can only be
1 (First) to 4 (Fourth) when the light comes on.
shifted from 1 (First)
to 4 (Fourth) instead of This light comes on when:
1 (First) to 2 (Second). • The engine coolant temperature is higher than
169°F (76°C),
• The vehicle is going 15 to 19 mph
(24 to 31 km/h) and
The shift must be completed into 4 (Fourth) to turn off
this feature. This helps the vehicle get the best possible • The vehicle 21 percent throttle or less.
fuel economy.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-39
Brake System Warning Light
The vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into { CAUTION:
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part
can still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking The brake system might not be working properly if
both parts need to be working well. the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.

If this warning light stays on after the engine is started,

the parking brake may still be set or there could be
United States Canada a brake problem. Refer to Parking Brake on page 2-32
to see if it is set. If the parking brake is not set, have
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it
the brake system inspected right away.
does not come on, have it fixed so it is ready to warn
if there is a problem. If the light comes on while driving and a CHECK BRAKE
FLUID message shows on the DIC, pull off the road and
stop carefully. The pedal may be harder to push or the
pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to
stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for
service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-28 and
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56 for more
information.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-40
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light Warning Light
For vehicles with The Traction Control
the Antilock Brake System (TCS) Warning
System (ABS), this light light comes on briefly while
comes on briefly when starting the engine.
the engine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your

dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the
light comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or indicator light then goes off.
comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service.
If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the If the light stays on, or comes on while driving and a
vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM message displays in
regular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicle the Driver Information Center (DIC), the vehicle needs
does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with service.
the regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on This light comes on when the TCS is turned off and a
page 3-40. TRACTION SYSTEM OFF message displays on the DIC.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), When this light is on, the TCS system does not limit
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56 for wheel spin.
all brake related DIC messages.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-41
This light turns off when the TCS is turned back on If the light stays on or comes on while driving, a chime
and a TRACTION SYSTEM ON message displays sounds and a SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING SYSTEM
on the DIC message appears on the DIC and the vehicle need
service.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 and
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56 for more The system is not working properly and the vehicle
information. needs service.
This light also comes on while the vehicle is in the This light also comes on when the Competitive Drive
Competitive Mode. See Active Handling System mode is selected.
on page 4-7. When the Active Handling System is turned off, the light
comes on, a chime sounds, and the TRACTION SYSTEM
Active Handling System Light AND ACTIVE HANDLING – OFF message displays in the
DIC. The Traction Control System is off and the Active
The Active Handling Handling System does not assist with controlling the
System light comes on vehicle.
briefly as the engine is
started. If the light does not, When the Active Handling System is turned back on,
have the vehicle serviced the light turns off, a chime sounds and the TRACTION
by your dealer/retailer. SYSTEM AND ACTIVE HANDLING – ON message
If the system is working displays in the DIC.
normally the light goes off. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56 for
more information.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-42
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire
pressure monitoring
system, this light comes
on briefly when the engine
is started.

It provides information about tire pressures and the

Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
United States Canada
When the Light is On Steady
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly
gage pointer moves into the shaded area, the engine underinflated.
is too hot.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
This means that the engine coolant has overheated. Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC
If the vehicle has been operating under normal driving Warnings and Messages on page 3-56 for more
conditions, pull off the road, stop the vehicle and information. Stop and check the tires as soon as
turn off the engine as soon as possible. it is safe to do so. If a tire is underinflated, inflate
See Engine Overheating on page 5-39 for more to the proper pressure. See Tires on page 5-62
information. for more information.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-43
When the Light Flashes First and Then is If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
On Steady the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
This indicates that there could be a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light
ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle.
cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-73 This system assists the service technician in correctly
for more information. diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with
Malfunction Indicator Lamp this light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy
Check Engine Light might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
It makes sure that emissions are at acceptable levels
of the vehicle or the replacement of the original
for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
tires with other than those of the same Tire
environment.
Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s
This comes on briefly emission controls and can cause this light to come
while starting the engine. on. Modifications to these systems could lead to
If it does not come on, have costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.
the vehicle serviced by your This could also result in a failure to pass a required
dealer/retailer. Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on page 5-3.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-44
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
two ways: doing the following:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected. • Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage the Tank on page 5-8. The diagnostic system
the emission control system on the vehicle. Diagnosis can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
and service might be required. improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
The following can prevent more serious damage to the driving trips with the cap properly installed should
vehicle: turn the light off.
• Reduce vehicle speed. • If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle
• Avoid hard accelerations. of water, the vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.
The condition is usually corrected when the electrical
• Avoid steep uphill grades. system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, light off.
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle. • Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poor
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous as designed and may cause: stalling after start-up,
steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear,
as possible. misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling
on acceleration. These conditions might go away
Light On Steady: An emission control system
once the engine is warmed up.
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required. If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank of
the proper fuel to turn the light off.
See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-45
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your for five seconds. The instrument panel, including the
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer check engine light, will light up and the ignition will be
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to on, but the engine will not start — press the bottom of
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might the Acc. button only briefly, less than five seconds,
have developed. the accessory power mode will be turned on, but not
the ignition. After the bulb check, press and release
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance the Acc. button again to turn the ignition off and avoid
Programs draining the vehicle’s battery.

Some state/provincial and local governments have or • The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD II
might begin programs to inspect the emission control (on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection emission control systems have not been completely
could prevent getting a vehicle registration. diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass if the battery has recently been replaced or if the
an inspection: battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check designed to evaluate critical emission control
engine light is on with the engine running. systems during normal driving. This can take
several days of routine driving. If this has been done
To perform a check engine light bulb check with the and the vehicle still does not pass the inspection for
keyless ignition, make sure the transmitter fob is in lack of OBD II system readiness, your dealer/retailer
the passenger compartment. See Ignition Positions can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
on page 2-23. Press the bottom of the Acc. button
on the instrument panel and hold the button down

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-46
Engine Oil Pressure Gage
{ CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance

can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
United States Canada changing engine oil.
The engine oil pressure gage shows the engine
oil pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals) when the engine is running.
Oil pressure should be 20 to 80 psi (140 to 550 kPa).
In certain situations such as long, extended idles on hot
days, it could read as low as 6 psi (40 kPa) and still
be considered normal. It may vary with engine speed,
outside temperature and oil viscosity, but readings
above the shaded area show the normal operating range.
Readings in the shaded area tell you that the engine is
low on oil, or that you might have some other oil problem.
See Engine Oil on page 5-19.
United States — Z06 Canada — Z06 and The engine oil pressure can also be displayed using the
and ZR1 Models ZR1 Models GAGES button on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-50.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-47
Security Light Lights On Reminder
For information regarding This light comes on
this light and the vehicle’s whenever the parking
security system, see lamps are on.
Theft-Deterrent System
on page 2-18.

See Headlamps on Reminder on page 3-15 for more

Fog Lamp Light information.

The fog lamp light comes Highbeam On Light

on when the fog lamps are
in use. This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.

The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 3-17 for more information.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8
for more information.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-48
Fuel Gage Here are five things that some owners ask about.
All these things are normal and do not indicate that
anything is wrong with the fuel gage.
The fuel gage shows how
much fuel the vehicle has • At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
left while the engine is on. before the gage reads the full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated half full, but it took a little more or less
than half of the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
• The gage pointer may move while cornering, braking
or speeding up.
• The gage may not indicate the tank is empty when
the ignition is turned off.
An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on. • The gage reading may change slightly within the first
several minutes after starting the vehicle.
When the needle approaches the low fuel symbol, a
chime sounds and LOW FUEL appears on the Driver See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-50 for more
Information Center (DIC) display. There is still a little information.
fuel left, but the vehicle’s fuel tank should be filled soon.
Press the RESET button to acknowledge a DIC
message(s). Pressing the RESET button also turns off
a DIC message but the LOW FUEL message comes
on again in 10 minutes if fuel is not added to the vehicle.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-49
Boost Gage (ZR1 Only) Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) display is located
on the instrument panel cluster and shows driver
personalization features and warning/status messages.
The DIC buttons are located on the instrument panel,
to the right of the cluster.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is turned on.
After displaying CORVETTE BY CHEVROLET, the DIC
shows the information that was last displayed before
the engine was turned off.
If a problem is detected, a warning message appears
United States Canada on the DIC display. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-56 for more information.
For vehicles that have this gage, it is located near the
driver side of the instrument panel cluster. DIC Operation and Displays
This gage indicates vacuum during light to moderate
Depending on the features on the vehicle, the drive
throttle and boost under heavier throttle.
gear may display on the DIC. See “Manual Paddle Shift”
It displays the air pressure level in the intake manifold under Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-26
before it enters the engine’s combustion chamber. and “Head-Up Display (HUD)” in the index of the
The gage is automatically centered at zero every time Navigation system manual for more information.
the engine is started. Actual vacuum or boost is displayed The Driver Information Center (DIC) has different modes
from this zero point. Changes in ambient pressure, which can be accessed by pressing the following buttons
such as driving in mountains and changing weather, located on the instrument panel, to the right of the
will slightly change the zero reading. instrument panel cluster.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-50
 2 (Gages): Press this button to display gage
information like oil pressure and temperature, coolant
temperature, automatic transmission fluid temperature,
if equipped, battery voltage, and front/rear tire pressures.
TRIP: Press this button to display your total and trip
distance driven, the elapsed time function, your average
speed, and the engine oil life.
OPTION: Press this button to choose personal options
that are available on your vehicle, depending on the
options your vehicle is equipped with, such as door
locks, easy entry seats, and language.
RESET: Press this button, used along with the other
buttons, to reset system functions, select personal
options, and turn off or acknowledge messages on
the DIC.

. 4 (Fuel): Press this button to display fuel information

such as fuel economy and range.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-51
FUEL Button Fuel Range: The range calculates the remaining
distance you can drive without refueling. It is based
The fuel button displays average fuel economy and on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in the tank.
instantaneous fuel economy, calculated for your specific
driving conditions, and range information. Press the fuel button again to display the range,
such as:
Average Fuel Economy: The average fuel economy • RANGE 30 MI or
is viewed as a long-term approximation of your overall
driving conditions. You should reset the average fuel • RANGE 48 km
economy display every time you refuel. If you press the If the LOW FUEL warning is displayed or if RANGE
RESET button in this mode while you are driving, the is less than 40 miles (64 km), the display will read
system will reset this display and begin figuring fuel RANGE LOW.
economy from that point in time.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is
Press the fuel button to display average fuel economy, an average of recent driving conditions. As your driving
such as: conditions change, this data is gradually updated
• AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY 20.1 MPG or automatically.
• AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY 11.7 L/100 km If the vehicle has been idling for a long time, the
range displayed on the DIC could be abnormally low.
Instantaneous Fuel Economy: Instantaneous fuel The vehicle must be driven 5–10 miles (8–16 km) to get
economy reflects only the fuel economy that the vehicle an accurate reading.
has right now and will change frequently as driving
conditions change. Unlike average fuel economy,
this menu item cannot be reset.
Press the fuel button again to display instantaneous fuel
economy, such as:
• INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY 20.1 MPG or
• INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY 11.7 L/100 km

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-52
GAGES Button Coolant Temperature: This display shows the engine
coolant temperature.
The gages button displays oil pressure, oil temperature,
coolant temperature, transmission fluid temperature Press the gages button again to display the coolant
for automatic transmission vehicles only, battery voltage, temperature, such as:
and tire pressure information. • COOLANT TEMPERATURE 123°F or
Oil Pressure: This display shows the oil pressure. • COOLANT TEMPERATURE 51°C
Press the gages button to display the oil pressure, If the coolant temperature is low, the display will
such as: show COOLANT TEMPERATURE LOW. If the coolant
temperature is high, the display will show COOLANT
• OIL PRESSURE 40 PSI or TEMPERATURE HIGH.
• OIL PRESSURE 276 kPa
Transmission Fluid Temperature: If you have an
Oil Temperature: This display shows the oil automatic transmission vehicle, this display shows the
temperature. automatic transmission fluid temperature.
Press the gages button again to display the oil Press the gages button again to display the automatic
temperature, such as: transmission fluid temperature, such as:
• OIL TEMPERATURE 234°F or • TRANS FLUID TEMP 123°F or
• OIL TEMPERATURE 112°C • TRANS FLUID TEMP 51°C
If the oil temperature is low, the display will show OIL If the transmission fluid temperature is low, the display
TEMPERATURE LOW. If the oil temperature is high, will show TRANS FLUID TEMP LOW. If the transmission
the display will show OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH. fluid temperature is high, the display will show TRANS
FLUID TEMP HIGH.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-53
Battery Voltage: This display shows the current battery TRIP Button
voltage.
The TRIP button displays the odometer, trip distance,
Press the gages button again to display the battery elapsed time, average speed, and oil life remaining
voltage, such as: information.
• BATTERY VOLTAGE 13.5 VOLTS
Odometer: The odometer shows how far your vehicle
Tire Pressure: This display shows the tire pressure for has been driven in either miles or kilometers. Press
each tire. the TRIP button to display odometer readings, such as:
Press the gages button again to display the tire pressure • ODOMETER 12345 MI or
for the front tires, such as: • ODOMETER 20008 km
• FRONT TIRE PRESSURES L 34 PSI R 33 PSI or You can also display the odometer by turning on the
• FRONT TIRE PRESSURES L 234 kPa R 228 kPa parking lamps.
Press the gages button again to display the tire pressure Trip Odometers: There are two trip odometers.
for the rear tires, such as: Press the TRIP button to display TRIP ODOMETER A
• REAR TIRE PRESSURES L 34 PSI R 33 PSI or readings and press the button again to display
TRIP ODOMETER B readings, such as:
• REAR TIRE PRESSURES L 234 kPa R 228 kPa
• TRIP ODOMETER A 130.5 MI or
• TRIP ODOMETER A 209.9 km
• TRIP ODOMETER B 300.5 MI or
• TRIP ODOMETER B 483.5 km
Both of the trip odometers can be used simultaneously.
The trip odometers can be reset by pressing the
RESET button on the DIC.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-54
There is also a miles since last ignition feature that Average Speed: Press the TRIP button until the
displays the number of miles (kilometers) driven since average speed is displayed, such as:
you last started the vehicle. Press and hold the RESET • AVERAGE SPEED 62 MPH or
button for three seconds, then release it. The miles
(kilometers) since the last ignition cycle will be set • AVERAGE SPEED 100 km/h
into the trip odometer.
Press and hold the RESET button to reset to
Elapsed Timer: Press the TRIP button until ELAPSED 0.0 mph (km/h).
TIMER is displayed, such as ELAPSED TIMER .00.
Engine Oil Life: Press the TRIP button until the engine
When the ignition is in on, the DIC can be used oil life is displayed, such as OIL LIFE REMAINING 89%.
as a stopwatch. The display can show hours, minutes
This is an estimate of the engine oil’s remaining
and seconds. The elapsed time indicator will record
useful life. It will show 100% when the system is reset
up to 23 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds, then it
after an oil change. It will alert you to change the oil
will reset to zero and continue counting. The display
on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
appears as ELAPSED TIMER .00 in the elapsed
time function. When the remaining oil life is low, the system will
alert you with the message CHANGE ENGINE OIL.
You can start or stop the elapsed time by pressing
the RESET button. To reset the elapsed time to zero, Remember, you must reset the engine oil life system
press the RESET button for three seconds while yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself.
the timer is displayed. To reset the system, see Engine Oil Life System
on page 5-26. Be careful not to reset the engine oil life
Pressing and holding the RESET button for at least
system accidentally at any time other than when the
10 seconds will reset the timer display to the time
oil has just been changed. It cannot be reset accurately
since last ignition cycle.
until the next oil change.
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 and Engine
Oil on page 5-19 for more information.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-55
OPTION Button Some messages may not require immediate action,
but you can press the RESET button to acknowledge
The OPTION button allows you to access the that you received the messages and to clear them from
PERSONAL OPTIONS menu and customize the the display.
personalization settings on your vehicle. See DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-73 for more Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display
information. because they are more urgent. These messages require
action before they can be cleared. You should take any
RESET Button messages that appear on the display seriously and
remember that clearing the messages will only make
The RESET button, used along with other buttons, will the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
reset system functions and turn off or acknowledge
messages on the DIC. The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.

DIC Warnings and Messages ABS (Antilock Brake System) ACTIVE

Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver This message displays when the Antilock Brake
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that System (ABS) is adjusting brake pressure to help
some action may be needed by the driver to correct avoid a braking skid.
the condition. Multiple messages may appear one after Slippery road conditions may exist if this message
another. You can scroll through the messages that may is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.
have been sent at the same time. The DIC is continuously The message stays on for a few seconds after the
updated with the vehicle performance status. system stops adjusting brake pressure. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) on page 4-5 for more information.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-56
ACTIVE HANDLING BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message displays when the Active Handling This message displays when the vehicle has detected
System is operating. The Active Handling System that the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable
is a computer controlled system that assists the driver point. The battery saver system starts reducing certain
in controlling the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. features of the vehicle that you may be able to notice.
You may feel or hear the system working and see the At the point that features are disabled, this message is
ACTIVE HANDLING message displayed in the DIC. displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to save the
This message stays on for a few seconds following the charge in the battery. Turn off unnecessary accessories
active handling event. This is normal when the system is to allow the battery to recharge.
operating. See Active Handling System on page 4-7 and
Braking on page 4-4. BUCKLE PASSENGER
ACTIVE HANDLING READY This message reminds you to buckle the passenger’s
safety belt.
This message displays when the functional check This message displays and a sound will be heard when
of the Active Handling System has been completed. the ignition is on, the driver’s safety belt is buckled, the
See Active Handling System on page 4-7 for more passenger’s safety belt is unbuckled with the passenger
information. airbag enabled, and the vehicle is in motion. You should
ATTACH TRUNK PARTITION have the passenger buckle their safety belt.
The reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on,
If the vehicle has a power convertible top, this message the vehicle is in motion, the driver is buckled and the
displays and a sound will be heard if the trunk partition passenger is still unbuckled, and the passenger airbag
is not in place. Open the hatch/trunk and make sure is enabled. If the passenger’s safety belt is already
the trunk partition is secure and no objects are on the buckled, this message will not come on.
trunk partition. See Rear Storage Area on page 2-53
for more information.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-57
BUCKLE SEATBELT CHANGE ENGINE OIL
This message reminds you to buckle the driver’s This message displays when the life of the engine oil
safety belt. has expired. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
After an oil change, the engine oil life system must be
This message displays and a sound will be heard when
the ignition is on, the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled, reset. See “Engine Oil Life” under DIC Operation and
and the vehicle is in motion. You should buckle Displays on page 3-50. Also, see Engine Oil on
your safety belt. page 5-19 and Engine Oil Life System on page 5-26
for more information.
If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignition is
on and the vehicle is in motion, the reminder will CHECK BRAKE FLUID
be repeated. If the driver’s safety belt is already
buckled, this message will not come on. This message displays, a sound will be heard, and
the brake system warning light on the instrument panel
This message is an additional reminder to the safety cluster turns on if the ignition is on to inform the driver that
belt reminder light in the instrument panel cluster. the brake fluid level is low. See Brake System Warning
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-35 for more Light on page 3-40. Have the brake system serviced by
information. your dealer/retailer as soon as possible. See Brakes on
page 5-43.
CHANGE BRAKE PADS
On vehicles with electronic brake pad wear sensors,
CHECK COOLANT LEVEL
this message will be displayed when the pads are worn. This message displays when the engine coolant level
See your dealer/retailer for service. is low. Have the cooling system serviced by your dealer/
retailer as soon as possible. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-34.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-58
CHECK GAS CAP CLOSE TRUNK TO MOVE TOP
This message displays if the fuel cap has not been fully This message displays and a sound will be heard
tightened. Check the fuel cap to make sure that it is on if the trunk is open while you are trying to operate the
properly. Once tightened, it takes at least one overnight convertible top. Make sure the trunk is closed before
park to reset or clear this message. If both the CHECK operating the convertible top. See Convertible Top
GAS CAP message and the malfunction indicator lamp in (Manual) on page 2-62 or Convertible Top (Power)
the instrument panel cluster are on, you may need to see on page 2-69.
your dealer/retailer for service. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 3-44 for more information. COMPETITIVE DRIVING MODE
CHECK OIL LEVEL This message displays and a sound will be heard when
the Competitive Driving mode is selected. The instrument
On some vehicles, this message displays and two panel cluster light will be on when the Competitive Driving
chimes sound if the oil level in the vehicle is low. mode is selected. The Traction Control System (TCS) will
Once the vehicle senses a change in the engine not be operating while in the Competitive Driving mode.
oil level, the light remains off. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Racing or Other
Competitive Driving on page 4-14 for more information.
If this message appears after starting the engine, the
engine oil level may be too low. You may need to
add oil. See Engine Overheating on page 5-39.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
The message reappears every 10 minutes until this
condition changes.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-59
COOLANT OVER TEMPERATURE ENGINE DRAG CONTROL ACTIVE
This message displays and a sound will be heard if the This message displays when engine drag control is
engine coolant exceeds 255°F (124°C). If you have been active. When driving in a lower gear in rainy, snowy,
operating the vehicle under normal driving conditions, pull or icy conditions and then letting up on the accelerator
off the road, stop the vehicle, and turn off the engine as or downshifting, the rear wheels may begin to slip
soon as possible. and this message displays. This message stays on
for a few seconds following the engine drag control event.
You can monitor the coolant temperature with the gages
button on the DIC or the engine coolant temperature ENGINE OVERHEATED – STOP
gage on the instrument panel cluster. See Engine ENGINE
Overheating on page 5-39, DIC Operation and Displays
on page 3-50, and Engine Coolant Temperature Gage This message displays and a sound will be heard when
on page 3-43. the engine has overheated. Stop and turn the engine
off immediately to avoid severe engine damage.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button. See Engine Overheating on page 5-39.
The message and sound will come back on until this
condition changes. If you do not press the RESET button, ENGINE PROTECTION REDUCE
the message remains on until the condition changes. ENGINE RPM
CRUISE DISENGAGED This message displays if the engine oil temperature
exceeds 320°F (160°C). Check the engine coolant
This message displays briefly when you disengage the temperature and engine oil level. If the engine is too
cruise control system by stepping on the brake on an hot, see Engine Overheating on page 5-39. The vehicle
automatic transmission vehicle or the clutch on a manual may need service, so see your dealer/retailer.
transmission vehicle, or by turning off the cruise control
switch. See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more You can monitor the oil temperature with the gages
information. button on the DIC. See DIC Operation and Displays
on page 3-50.
Multiple chimes sound when this message is displayed.
This message remains displayed and active until the
issue is resolved.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-60
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED HOT ENGINE AIR CONDITIONING OFF
This message displays if it is dark enough outside and This message displays when the engine coolant
the headlamps and the Twilight Sentinel® controls are becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
off. This message informs the driver that turning on the To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
exterior lamps is recommended. It has become dark conditioning compressor is automatically turned off.
enough outside to require the headlamps and/or other When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the A/C
exterior lamps. operation automatically resumes. You can continue to
drive the vehicle. If this message continues to appear,
HIGH TIRE PRESSURE have the system repaired by your dealer/retailer as
soon as possible to avoid compressor damage.
This message displays when one or more of the tires is
over-inflated. This message also displays LEFT FRONT, ICE POSSIBLE
RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to
indicate which tire is affected. You can receive more This message displays when the outside air temperature
than one tire pressure message at a time. To read other is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust
messages that may have been sent at the same time, your driving accordingly.
press the RESET button. If a tire pressure message
appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have LOW FUEL
the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on
This message displays when the fuel tank is less than
the Tire Loading Information label. See Run-Flat Tires
10 percent full and the display is turned off. A sound will
on page 5-69, Loading the Vehicle on page 4-23,
be heard when this message is displayed. Refill the
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-71, and Tire Pressure
fuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage on
Monitor System on page 5-73. The DIC also shows the
page 3-49.
tire pressure values. See DIC Operation and Displays
on page 3-50.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
A message reappears every 10 minutes until the
condition is corrected.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-61
LOW OIL PRESSURE This message displays when one or more of the
tires is under-inflated. This message also displays
This message displays if low oil pressure levels occur. LEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, or
If this message appears while the engine is running, RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire is affected. Multiple
stop the engine and do not operate it until the cause chimes sound and the tire pressure light on the
of low oil pressure is corrected. Severe damage to the instrument panel cluster turns on when this message
engine can result. A sound will be heard when this is displayed. See Tire Pressure Light on page 3-43.
message is displayed. See Engine Oil on page 5-19. You can receive more than one tire pressure message
at a time. To read other messages that may have been
LOW TIRE PRESSURE sent at the same time, press the RESET button. If a tire
pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon
as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set
{ CAUTION: to those shown on the Tire Loading Information label.
See Run-Flat Tires on page 5-69, Loading the Vehicle on
page 4-23, Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-71, and
When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-73. The DIC
message is displayed on the Driver Information also shows the tire pressure values. See DIC Operation
Center, your vehicle’s handling capabilities will and Displays on page 3-50.
be reduced during severe maneuvers. The active
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
handling system will be affected. See Active A message reappears every 10 minutes until the
Handling System on page 4-7. If you drive too condition is corrected.
fast, you could lose control of your vehicle. You or
others could be injured. Do not drive over 55 mph
(90 km/h) when the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or
TIRE FLAT message is displayed. Drive cautiously
and check your tire pressures as soon as you can.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-62
MAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH (129 km/h) • The vehicle is experiencing Electromagnetic
Interference (EMI). Some locations, such as airports,
This message displays when a malfunction is present in automatic toll booths, and some gas stations have
the Selective Ride Control system. The vehicle speed EMI fields which may interfere with the keyless
will be limited to a value determined by the vehicle when access transmitter.
the shock absorber system has failed and the shocks
are in their full soft mode. Have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
The message reappears every 10 minutes until this
condition changes.
NO FOBS DETECTED
This message displays if the vehicle does not detect the
presence of a keyless access transmitter when you have
attempted to start the vehicle or a vehicle door has just
closed. The following conditions may cause this message
to appear:
• Driver-added equipment plugged into the accessory If moving the transmitter to different locations within
power outlet on the center console is causing the vehicle does not help, place the transmitter in the
interference. Examples of these devices are cell glove box transmitter pocket with the buttons facing to
phones and cell phone chargers, two-way radios, the right and then press the START button.
power inverters, or similar items. Try moving the • The vehicle’s battery voltage is low. The battery
keyless access transmitter away from these devices voltage must be above 10 volts for the keyless
when starting the vehicle. In addition, PDA devices access transmitter to be detected properly.
and remote garage and gate openers may also
generate Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) that
may interfere with the keyless access transmitter.
Do not carry the keyless access transmitter in the
same pocket or bag as these devices.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-63
NO FOB - OFF OR RUN? PRESS BRAKE TO START ENGINE
This message displays when the keyless access (Automatic Transmission Only)
transmitter is not detected inside the vehicle while you This message displays if you try to start the engine by
are trying to turn the ignition off. The vehicle may be pressing the keyless ignition start button without having
near a strong radio antenna signal causing the keyless the brake pressed. The brake needs to be pressed when
access system to be jammed. The vehicle will remain in starting the engine. See Ignition Positions on page 2-23
ACCESSORY until the vehicle is turned off or is restarted, for more information.
or five minutes has expired. If you turn the ignition off and
you cannot find the keyless access transmitter, you will REDUCED ENGINE POWER
not be able to restart the vehicle. The keyless access
transmitter needs to be inside of the vehicle in order for If this message displays and the check engine light
the vehicle to start. See Starting the Engine on page 2-24 comes on, a noticeable reduction in the vehicle’s
for more information. performance may occur. If the REDUCED ENGINE
POWER message is displayed, but there is no
OPTIONS UNAVAILABLE reduction in performance, proceed to your destination.
The performance may be reduced the next time the
This message displays for a few seconds if a keyless vehicle is driven.
access transmitter that is not labelled 1 or 2 is used
and you try to personalize the features on the vehicle The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while the
by pressing the OPTION button. The personalization REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed, but
system will not recognize the transmitter and the DIC acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime the
will not display the current driver number or the menus check engine light stays on, the vehicle should be taken
used to set personalizations. The personalization to your dealer/retailer as soon as possible for diagnosis
features will then be set to the default states. See DIC and repair. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-44
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-73 for more for more information.
information.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-64
Multiple chimes sound when this message is displayed. SERVICE ANTILOCK BRAKES
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button. If this message displays while you are driving, stop as
The message reappears every five minutes until this soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
condition changes. engine again to reset the system. If the message stays
If the REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is on, or comes back on again while you are driving, the
displayed in combination with the COOLANT OVER vehicle is in need of service. See your dealer/retailer.
TEMPERATURE message, see Engine Overheating If the antilock brake system (ABS) warning light is on
on page 5-39. and the regular brake system warning light is not on,
you still have brakes, but do not have ABS. If the regular
SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING SYSTEM brake system warning light is also on, you do not have
ABS and there is a problem with the brakes. See Antilock
This message displays if there is a problem with the
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light on page 3-41 and
Active Handling System and the vehicle needs service.
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-40.
The active handling system light on the instrument panel
cluster also turns on and a sound will be heard. See your If this message is displayed, the Traction Control
dealer/retailer. When this message is displayed, the System (TCS) and the Active Handling System will
system is not working. Adjust your driving accordingly. also be disabled. The DIC will scroll three messages:
See Active Handling System on page 4-7 for more SERVICE ANTILOCK BRAKES, SERVICE TRACTION
information. SYSTEM, and SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING, and the
instrument panel cluster lights will come on along with
SERVICE AIR CONDITIONING a sound. When the service message is displayed, the
computer controlled systems will not assist the driver.
This message displays when the electronic sensors that
Have the system repaired by your dealer/retailer as
control the air conditioning and heating systems are no
soon as possible. Adjust your driving accordingly.
longer working. Have the climate control system serviced
by your dealer/retailer if you notice a drop in heating and To acknowledge these messages, press the RESET
air conditioning efficiency. button.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-65
SERVICE CHARGING SYSTEM SERVICE RIDE CONTROL
If this message displays while you are driving, there This message displays when the Selective Ride Control
may be a problem with the electrical charging system. system has detected a malfunction and the system must
It could mean that there is a loose or broken drive belt be serviced. See your dealer/retailer. If a fault is present
or that there is another electrical problem. Have the in the Selective Ride Control system which causes the
vehicle checked right away by your dealer/retailer. shocks to be in their full soft condition, the messages
Driving while this message is on could drain the battery. SERVICE RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS INOPERATIVE,
and MAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH (129 km/h) will display
If you must drive a short distance with the message
on, be certain to turn off the vehicle’s accessories, such together. See Selective Ride Control on page 4-9 for
as the radio and air conditioner. more information.

Multiple chimes sound when this message is displayed. SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
button. The message reappears every 10 minutes Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
until this condition changes. pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on
SERVICE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM page 3-43. Several conditions may cause this message
This message displays if an electrical problem has to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
occurred within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). page 5-75 for more information. If the warning comes
Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. on and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE FUEL SYSTEM
This message displays if the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) has detected a problem within the fuel system.
Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
This message also displays when the cluster is
not getting fuel information from the PCM.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-66
SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM SET PARK BRAKE FOR SEAT RECALL
If this message displays when you are driving, there is If the vehicle has a manual transmission, this message
a problem with the Traction Control System (TCS) and displays if you try to recall the memory positions
the vehicle is in need of service. See your dealer/retailer. when the ignition is on and the parking brake is not set.
When this message is displayed, the system will not limit If the vehicle is on, you must set the parking brake in
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. order for the memory positions to recall. See Memory
The traction control system (TCS) warning light on Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 1-4 for more
information.
the instrument panel cluster will also turn on and
a sound will be heard. SET PARK BRAKE TO MOVE TOP
When this message is displayed, the computer
controlled systems will not assist the driver in If the vehicle has a manual transmission, this message
controlling the vehicle. Have the system repaired displays and a sound will be heard if you try to operate
by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible. Adjust your the power convertible top without first setting the parking
driving accordingly. See Traction Control System (TCS) brake. Set the parking brake before trying to operate the
on page 4-6 for more information. power convertible top. See Convertible Top (Manual) on
page 2-62 or Convertible Top (Power) on page 2-69 for
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button. more information.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION SHIFT TO PARK
This message displays when there is a problem with the If the vehicle has an automatic transmission, this
transmission. See your dealer/retailer for service. message displays if the vehicle is not in P (Park) when
the engine is being turned off. The vehicle will be in
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON ACCESSORY Once the shift lever is moved to P (Park),
This message displays and a sound will be heard when the vehicle will turn off.
there may be an electrical or another system problem
with the vehicle. Have your vehicle checked by your
dealer/retailer if this message keeps appearing.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-67
The vehicle will remain in ACCESSORY, without the TIRE FLAT
20 minute time-out period, until the shift lever is moved
to P (Park) or until the driver presses the pushbutton
to restart the vehicle. See Ignition Positions on
page 2-23 for more information. { CAUTION:
SHIFT TO PARK OR SET PARK BRAKE When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT
FOR TOP message is displayed on the Driver Information
Center, your vehicle’s handling capabilities will be
If the vehicle has an automatic transmission, this
message displays and a sound will be heard if you try reduced during severe maneuvers. If you drive too
to operate the power convertible top without first shifting fast, you could lose control of your vehicle. You or
into P (Park) or setting the parking brake. Either shift the others could be injured. Do not drive over 55 mph
vehicle into P (Park) or set the parking brake before trying (90 km/h) when the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or
to operate the power convertible top. See Convertible TIRE FLAT message is displayed. Drive cautiously
Top (Manual) on page 2-62 or Convertible Top (Power) and check your tire pressures as soon as you can.
on page 2-69 for more information.

SHOCKS INOPERATIVE This message displays when one or more of the tires is
flat. This message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT
This message displays when a malfunction is present
FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate
in the Selective Ride Control system which is causing
which tire is affected. Multiple chimes sound and the
the shocks to be in their full soft mode. This is a warning
tire pressure light on the instrument panel cluster comes
to the driver that the vehicle handling may be affected.
on when this message is displayed. See Tire Pressure
Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as
Light on page 3-43.
soon as possible.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
The message reappears every 10 minutes until this
condition changes.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-68
This message is followed by the MAXIMUM SPEED TOP MOTOR OVER TEMPERATURE
55 MPH (90 km/h) message, and then by the REDUCED
HANDLING message. The Active Handling System This message displays and a sound will be heard when
will intervene more quickly when a flat tire has been the power convertible top button is pressed and the
detected. Adjust your driving accordingly. power convertible top pump motor temperature is over
221°F (105°C). Wait for the power convertible top
You can receive more than one tire pressure message pump motor to cool down before using the power
at a time. To read other messages that may have been convertible top.
sent at the same time, press the RESET button. If a tire
pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon TOP NOT SECURE
as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set
to those shown on the Tire Loading Information label. This message displays and a sound will be heard when
See Run-Flat Tires on page 5-69, Loading the Vehicle on the power convertible top button is released before the
page 4-23, Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-71, and top open or close operation is complete or if the top is
Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-73. The DIC closed without the header latch engaged. Press and hold
also shows the tire pressure values. See DIC Operation the convertible top button to fully open or close the top,
and Displays on page 3-50. and make sure that the header latch is engaged after
the top is closed.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
A message reappears every 10 minutes until the TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVE
condition is corrected.
This message displays when the Traction Control
TOO COLD TO MOVE TOP System (TCS) is limiting wheel spin. Slippery road
conditions may exist if this message is displayed, so
This message displays and a sound will be heard when adjust your driving accordingly. The message stays on
the power convertible top button is pressed and the for a few seconds after the TCS stops limiting wheel
power convertible top pump motor temperature is below spin. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6
-4°F (-20°C). Wait for the power convertible top pump for more information.
motor to warm up before using the power convertible top.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-69
TRACTION SYSTEM AND ACTIVE TRACTION SYSTEM – OFF
HANDLING – OFF This message displays and stays on, a sound will be
This message displays, the instrument panel cluster heard, and the traction control system (TCS) warning light
light turns on, and a sound will be heard when the on the instrument panel cluster turns on when the TCS
Traction Control System (TCS) and Active Handling is turned off by pressing the Active Handling System
System are turned off by pressing the Active Handling button on the console. See Traction Control System
System button on the console for five seconds. (TCS) Warning Light on page 3-41. See Traction
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) remains on with the Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 for more information.
TCS and Active Handling System off. Adjust your driving To acknowledge the message, press the RESET
accordingly. See Traction Control System (TCS) on button.
page 4-6 and Active Handling System on page 4-7
for more information. TRACTION SYSTEM – ON
To acknowledge this message, press the RESET This message displays and a sound will be heard
button. when the Traction Control System (TCS) is turned on
by pressing the Active Handling System button on the
TRACTION SYSTEM AND ACTIVE console. This message automatically clears from the DIC
HANDLING – ON display on its own. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-6 for more information.
If the Traction Control System (TCS) and Active
Handling System are off, this message displays briefly,
the instrument panel cluster light turns off, and a sound
will be heard when the TCS and Active Handling System
are turned on by briefly pressing the Active Handling
System button on the console. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-6 and Active Handling
System on page 4-7 for more information.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-70
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
The message reappears every 10 minutes until this
This message displays and four chimes sound if the condition changes. If you do not press the RESET button,
transmission fluid temperature rises above 270°F (132°C) the message remains on the display until the condition
or rises rapidly. The transmission may shift gears or changes.
apply the torque converter clutch to reduce the fluid
temperature. Driving aggressively or driving on long hills TURN SIGNAL ON
can cause the transmission fluid temperature to be higher
than normal. If this message appears, you may continue This message displays and a sound will be heard if a
to drive at a slower speed. Monitor the transmission fluid turn signal is left on for three-quarters of a mile (1.2 km).
temperature and allow it to cool to at least 230°F (110°C). Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the off
The transmission fluid temperature can be monitored position.
with the gages button on the DIC. See DIC Operation To acknowledge this message, press the RESET
and Displays on page 3-50 and Automatic Transmission button.
Fluid on page 5-31. Also check the engine coolant
temperature. If it is also hot, see Engine Overheating UNLATCH HEADER TO MOVE TOP
on page 5-39.
This message displays and a sound will be heard if you
If this message is displayed during normal vehicle try to lower the convertible top without first unlocking
operation on flat roads, the vehicle may need service. the top. Move the latch handle to unlock the convertible
See your dealer/retailer for an inspection. top. See Convertible Top (Manual) on page 2-62 or
If driving in a performance or competitive manner, Convertible Top (Power) on page 2-69.
the use of (S) Sport Automatic Mode or (S) Sport
Manual Paddle Shift gear selection is recommended.
See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-26
for more information.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-71
Other Messages • INTRUSION SENSOR OFF, if your vehicle has this
feature
Here are more messages that you can receive on your
Driver Information Center (DIC). To acknowledge a • INTRUSION SENSOR ON, if your vehicle has this
message and read another message that may have feature
come on at the same time, press the RESET button. • KNOWN FOB
• ACCESSORY MODE ON See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
Keyless Access System Operation on page 2-5.
• BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH
See Voltmeter Gage on page 3-38. • MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FOBS LEARNED
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
• BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW Keyless Access System Operation on page 2-5.
See Voltmeter Gage on page 3-38.
• OFF–ACCESSORY TO LEARN
• CHECK WASHER FLUID See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-42. Keyless Access System Operation on page 2-5.
• CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (XXX km/h) • PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
See Cruise Control on page 3-10. • READY FOR FOB #X
• DRIVER DOOR AJAR See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
• FOB AUTOLEARN WAIT XX MINUTES Keyless Access System Operation on page 2-5.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under • TONNEAU AJAR (Convertible)
Keyless Access System Operation on page 2-5. • TRUNK AJAR (Convertible)
• FOB BATTERY LOW • UPSHIFT NOW
See “Battery Replacement” under Keyless Access See Manual Transmission Operation on page 2-30.
System Operation on page 2-5.
• HATCH AJAR (Coupe)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-72
DIC Vehicle Personalization The current driver’s preferences are recalled when one
of the following occurs:
Many features on your vehicle can be personalized. • The lock or unlock button on the keyless access
This means that the operation of these features can be transmitter, labelled 1 or 2, is pressed.
set to operate differently depending on who is driving
the vehicle. See “Personal Options” later in this section • The appropriate memory button, 1 or 2, located
for the features that you can personalize. on the driver’s door is pressed. See Memory
Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 1-4
The personalization settings for other features are
for more information.
automatically updated and saved as the driver adjusts
them. These include the following settings and presets: • A valid keyless access transmitter is detected upon
• The radio presets, tone, volume, fade, balance, opening the driver’s door.
equalization (EQ) settings and source (radio or CD) If more than one valid keyless access transmitter is
detected upon opening the driver’s door, the driver
• The last climate control setting preferences for the lowest driver number will be recalled.
• The Head-Up Display (HUD) position and dimming If a keyless access transmitter that is not labelled 1 or 2
level, if your vehicle has this feature is used, the personalization system will not recognize the
• The instrument panel cluster dimming level and last transmitter. The Driver Information Center (DIC) will not
selected DIC display display a current driver number and the features that are
normally programmed through the DIC will be set to the
Separate personalization settings are saved for default states. Also, if the OPTION button is pressed,
two different drivers. One of the keyless access the DIC does not display the menus used to set
transmitters is assigned to driver 1. The other is personalizations, but instead displays OPTIONS
assigned to driver 2. The back of the keyless access UNAVAILABLE for a few seconds.
transmitters are labelled 1 or 2 to correspond to each
driver.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-73
Entering the Personal Options Menu Personal Options
To enter the personal options menu, use the following The following options are available for programming:
steps:
Display Units: This option allows you to choose
1. If you have an automatic transmission vehicle, turn the measurement units.
the vehicle on with the shift lever in P (Park).
If you have a manual transmission vehicle, turn the Press the OPTION button until DISPLAY UNITS
vehicle on with the parking brake set. appears on the display, then press the RESET button
to scroll through the following modes:
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off. • ENGLISH (default)
2. Press the OPTION button and you will enter the • METRIC
PERSONAL OPTIONS menu. If you choose ENGLISH, all information will be displayed
The DIC will display the current driver in English units.
number (1 or 2) for a few seconds and then will
If you choose METRIC, all information will be displayed
display instructions on which buttons to use for
in metric units.
setting the personalizations. The RESET button
is used to select a setting for a particular feature. When the mode you want is selected, press the
The OPTION button is used to move to the next OPTION button to set your choice and advance to
feature. the next personal option.
3. Press the OPTION button while the instruction Auto Memory Recall (Automatic Transmission only):
screen is displayed to enter the first personalization If your automatic transmission vehicle has the memory
menu item. package, you may have this option. This option allows
4. Once you have cycled through all of the personal the driver’s seat, the telescopic steering column, if your
options, pressing the OPTION button a final time vehicle has this feature, and the outside rearview mirrors
exits the personal options menu. In addition, if no to automatically move to the current driver’s set position
button is pressed within 45 seconds, the DIC will when the engine starts.
exit the personal options menu.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-74
Press the OPTION button until AUTO MEMORY RECALL In order for the Auto Exit Recall feature to work on
appears on the display, then press the RESET button to an automatic transmission vehicle, the vehicle must
scroll through the following modes: be in P (Park). On a manual transmission vehicle,
• YES the parking brake must be set.
Press the OPTION button until AUTO EXIT RECALL
• NO (default) appears on the display, then press the RESET button
If you choose YES, the driver’s seat, the outside to scroll through the following modes:
rearview mirrors and the telescopic steering column, • YES
if your vehicle has this feature, positions are recalled
when you turn the ignition on. • NO (default)
If you choose NO, this option will turn off. If you choose YES, when you turn the ignition off and
When the mode you want is selected, press the open the driver’s door or press the unlock button on the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance keyless access transmitter, the seat and the telescopic
to the next personal option. steering wheel, if your vehicle has this feature, will return
to their stored exit positions for an easy exit or an easy
Auto Exit Recall: If your vehicle has the memory entrance when returning to the vehicle.
package, you may have this option. This option allows The seat and steering wheel will only return to the
the driver’s seat and telescopic steering column, if your stored driving position if you press the appropriate
vehicle has this feature, to automatically move to the memory button or activate the auto memory recall
current driver’s exit position when one of the following feature.
occurs:
If you choose NO, this option will turn off.
• The vehicle is turned off or in Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) or accessory mode and the driver’s When the mode you want is selected, press the
door is opened. OPTION button to set your choice and advance
to the next personal option.
• The vehicle is turned off or in RAP and the unlock
button on the keyless access transmitter is pressed.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-75
Approach Lights: This option briefly turns on the When the mode you want is selected, press the
parking lamps, the high-beam headlamps and the OPTION button to set your choice and advance to
back-up lamps during low light periods when the the next personal option.
keyless access transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle.
Twilight Delay: This option allows you to set the
Press the OPTION button until APPROACH LIGHTS amount of time you want the parking lamps and
appears on the display, then press the RESET button to high-beam headlamps to remain on after you exit
scroll through the following modes: the vehicle. This will occur when the vehicle is off or in
• OFF RAP and the headlamps are on due to the automatic
headlamp system. The parking lamps and high-beam
• ON (default) headlamps will remain on until the driver selected time
If you choose OFF, this option will turn off. expires, the exterior lamp control is activated or the
vehicle is no longer off or in RAP.
If you choose ON, the parking lamps, the high-beam
headlamps, and the back-up lamps will come on Press the OPTION button until TWILIGHT DELAY
for 20 seconds during low light periods when all appears on the display, then press the RESET button
of the following occurs: to scroll through the following modes:
• You press the unlock button on the keyless access • OFF
transmitter. • 15 S
• Both of the doors are closed. • 30 S (default)
• The vehicle is off or in RAP. • 90 S
The lamps remain on for 20 seconds or until a door is If you choose OFF, this option will turn off.
opened, the lock button on the keyless access transmitter
is pressed or the vehicle is no longer off or in RAP. If you choose 15 S, the twilight delay time will be set to
15 seconds.
See Keyless Access System on page 2-4 for more
information. If you choose 30 S, the twilight delay time will be set to
30 seconds.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-76
If you choose 90 S, the twilight delay time will be set to Flash at Lock: This option activates the front and rear
90 seconds. turn signals for one long flash when the lock button on the
keyless access transmitter is pressed. This will only occur
When the mode you want is selected, press the
when the vehicle is off. If the lock button on the keyless
OPTION button to set your choice and advance
access transmitter is pressed again within five seconds,
to the next personal option.
the horn will sound regardless of which setting you have
Flash at Unlock: This option activates the front and selected.
rear turn signals for two short flashes when the unlock Press the OPTION button until FLASH AT LOCK appears
or hatch/trunk button on the keyless access transmitter on the display, then press the RESET button to scroll
is pressed. This will only occur when the vehicle is off. through the following modes:
Press the OPTION button until FLASH AT UNLOCK • YES (default)
appears on the display, then press the RESET button to
scroll through the following modes: • NO
• YES (default) If you choose YES, the front and rear turn signals will
flash once when you press the lock button on the
• NO keyless access transmitter.
If you choose YES, the front and rear turn signals If you choose NO, this option will turn off.
will flash twice when you press the unlock button or the
hatch/trunk button on the keyless access transmitter. When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance
If you choose NO, this option will turn off. to the next personal option.
When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-77
FOB Reminder: This option sounds the horn three For example, if there are two keyless access transmitters
times when the driver’s door is closed and there is a in the vehicle and one is removed, the other will be locked
keyless access transmitter inside the interior of the in. The keyless access transmitter locked in the vehicle
vehicle. This will only occur when the vehicle is off. can still be used to start the vehicle or unlock the doors, if
needed. A person approaching the outside of the locked
Press the OPTION button until FOB REMINDER appears vehicle without an authorized keyless access transmitter,
on the display, then press the RESET button to scroll however, will not be able to open the door, even with a
through the following modes: transmitter in the vehicle.
• YES
You may temporarily disable the passive door locking
• NO (default) feature by pressing the door unlock switch for
three seconds on an open door. Passive door locking
If you choose YES, the horn will sound three times
will then remain disabled until a door lock switch is
when a keyless access transmitter is inside of the
pressed or until the power mode transitions from the
vehicle while the ignition is turned off and the driver’s
off power mode.
door is closed.
If you choose NO, this option will turn off. Press the OPTION button until PASSIVE DOOR
LOCKING appears on the display, then press the
When the mode you want is selected, press the RESET button to scroll through the following modes:
OPTION button to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option. • OFF (default)
Passive Door Locking: This option allows you to
• SILENT
select whether the doors automatically lock during normal • HORN
vehicle exit. When the ignition is turned off and all doors
If you choose OFF, this option will turn off.
become closed, the vehicle will determine how many
keyless access transmitters remain in the vehicle interior. If you choose SILENT, the doors will automatically
If at least one keyless access transmitter has been lock a short time after you remove a keyless access
removed from the interior of the vehicle, the doors transmitter from the interior of the vehicle and close
will lock after a short delay. both doors.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-78
If you choose HORN, the doors will automatically lock If you choose BOTH, both doors will automatically
and the horn will sound a short time after you remove unlock when you approach and open the driver’s door
a keyless access transmitter from the interior of the with the keyless access transmitter.
vehicle and close both doors.
Auto Unlock: This option allows you to select whether
If you are parking in a quiet area and do not want the the driver’s door, both doors or neither door automatically
horn to sound when the doors lock, press the lock button unlocks when the shift lever is moved into P (Park) for
on the keyless access transmitter immediately after automatic transmission vehicles or when the ignition is
removing it from the interior and closing the doors. turned off or is in RAP for manual transmission vehicles.
This will lock the doors and cancel the passive locking
for this ignition cycle. Press the OPTION button until AUTO UNLOCK appears
on the display, then press the RESET button to scroll
When the mode you want is selected, press the through the following modes:
OPTION button to set your choice and advance
to the next personal option. • OFF
Passive Door Unlock: This option allows you to select • DRIVER
which doors will automatically unlock when you approach • BOTH (default)
and open the driver’s door with the keyless access
transmitter. See Door Locks on page 2-10 for more If you choose OFF, this option will turn off.
information. If you choose DRIVER, on automatic transmission
Press the OPTION button until PASSIVE DOOR vehicles, the driver’s door will automatically unlock
UNLOCK appears on the display, then press the when the shift lever is moved into P (Park). On manual
RESET button to scroll through the following modes: transmission vehicles, the driver’s door will automatically
unlock when the ignition is turned off or is in RAP.
• DRIVER (default)
If you choose BOTH, on automatic transmission
• BOTH vehicles, both doors will automatically unlock when
If you choose DRIVER, only the driver’s door will the shift lever is moved into P (Park). On manual
automatically unlock when you approach and open transmission vehicles, both doors will automatically
the driver’s door with the keyless access transmitter. unlock when the ignition is turned off or is in RAP.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-79
When the mode you want is selected, press the When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance OPTION button to set your choice and advance to the
to the next personal option. next personal option.
Language: This option allows you to select the Personalize Name: This option allows you to type
language the DIC, the Head-Up Display (HUD), if your in a name or greeting that will appear on the DIC
vehicle has this feature, and the radio uses to display display whenever the corresponding keyless access
messages. Each language mode will be displayed in its transmitter (1 or 2) is used or one of the memory
own language. For example, English will be displayed as buttons (1 or 2) located on the driver’s door is pressed.
ENGLISH, Spanish as ESPANOL, etc. If your vehicle has Press the OPTION button until PERSONALIZE NAME
the navigation system, you will not have the Japanese appears on the display, then press the RESET button
language mode. to scroll through the following modes:
Press the OPTION button until LANGUAGE appears • YES
on the display, then press the RESET button to
scroll through the following modes: • NO (default)
• ENGLISH (default) If you choose YES, you can type in a name that will
appear on the DIC display.
• DEUTSCH (German)
To program a name, use the following procedure:
• FRANCAIS (French)
1. Enter the PERSONAL OPTIONS menu and
• ITALIANO (Italian) select the driver number (1 or 2) that you would
• ESPANOL (Spanish) like to program by following the instructions listed
previously under “Entering the Personal
If you choose a language that you do not understand, Options Menu”.
press the OPTION and RESET buttons for five seconds.
The DIC will begin displaying all of the various languages 2. Press the OPTION button until the PERSONALIZE
one by one for as long as the buttons are pressed. When NAME option appears on the display.
the desired language is displayed, release the buttons 3. Select YES under PERSONALIZE NAME by
and the DIC will set to this language. pressing the RESET button.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-80
4. Press the OPTION button and a cursor will display 7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the name or greeting
where you can insert a letter. you want is complete. After the name or greeting
5. Press the OPTION button again until the letter you is complete, keep pressing the RESET button
want is displayed. To scroll through the letters faster until the display turns blank and exits out of this
and without a beeping noise, keep the OPTIONS option. You can program up to 20 characters.
button depressed. There are alpha/numeric If you choose NO, this option will turn off.
characters and a blank space available.
If a customized name or greeting is not programmed,
6. Then press the RESET button to select the letter of the DIC display will show Driver 1 or Driver 2 to
your choice and proceed on to the next space to correspond with either the number on the back of the
the right. keyless access transmitter (1 or 2) that is being used
If you make a mistake and would like to clear or or to the memory button (1 or 2) that is pressed.
replace a letter, perform the following steps: PERSONALIZE NAME is the last option available to
6.1. Press the RESET button to reach the letter program in the PERSONAL OPTIONS menu. Pressing
you would like to change. the OPTION button after this setting will exit you from the
6.2. Press the OPTION button to scroll through PERSONAL OPTIONS menu. The last item you were in
the letter choices. prior to entering PERSONAL OPTIONS will then display
on the DIC.
6.3. Press the RESET button to select the letter
and proceed on to the next space to the right.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-81
Audio System(s) Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the Adding audio or communication equipment could
following pages to become familiar with its features. interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
{ CAUTION: telephone equipment.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods With RAP, the audio system can be played even after
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
you or others. Do not give extended attention to (RAP) on page 2-24 for more information.
entertainment tasks while driving.
Setting the Clock
This system provides access to many audio and non To set the clock:
audio listings.
1. Press and hold H until the correct hour displays.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving, 2. Press and hold M until the correct minute displays.
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
3. Press the tune knob to select between the 12 or
• Become familiar with the operation and controls of 24 hour display format.
the audio system.
The clock mode automatically times out with the
• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset changed display format set as the current default setting.
radio stations.
For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 4-2.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-82
Radio(s) Playing the Radio
Top Knob (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system
on and off. Turn to increase or decrease the volume.
MUTE: Press to silence the system. Press again to turn
the sound on.
This button is not available on the Six-Disc CD Radio.

4 (Information): Press until the desired display is

shown, then hold for two seconds until radio beeps once
to change the default display. The selected display is now
the default.
For RDS:
Press 4 to change the display. The display options are
Single CD Radio shown, Six-Disc CD Radio similar station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the name
of the program (if available).
The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio For XM™:
system.
An indicator light on the upper left side of the radio Press 4 to retrieve four different categories of information
flashes when the ignition is off, to indicate the theft related to the current song or channel: Artist, Song Title,
deterrent feature is set. For more information, see Category or PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.
Theft-Deterrent Feature on page 3-107.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-83
Audio Settings To adjust the Fade:

Press and hold O e when no tone or speaker control O e until FADE displays
Press and release
is displayed to adjust all tone and speaker controls • Turn the O e knob to move the sound toward the
to the middle position. AUDIO SETTINGS CENTERED front or the rear speakers.
displays.
• Press and hold the O e knob until the level
Adjusting the Tone (Bass/Treble) changes to the middle position.

O e (Bass/Treble): To adjust the Bass or Treble: AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): The radio saves
separate AUTO EQ settings for each preset and source.
Press and release O e until BASS or TREBLE
For vehicles without the Bose® sound system:
displays.
• Press AUTO EQ to select equalization settings
• Turn the O e knob to increase or to decrease the designed for CLASSICAL, POP, ROCK, JAZZ,
level. TALK, and COUNTRY.
• Press and hold the O e knob until the level • Selecting CUSTOM or changing bass or treble,
changes to the middle position. returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble
settings.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
For vehicles with the Bose® sound system:
O e (Balance/Fade): To adjust the Balance: • Press AUTO EQ to select equalization settings
Press and release O e until BALANCE displays. from EQ1 through EQ6.

• Turn the O e knob to move the sound toward the • Selecting CUSTOM or changing bass or treble,
returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble
right or the left speakers.
settings.
• Press and hold the O e knob until the level
changes to the middle position.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-84
AUTO n (Automatic Volume): Automatic volume For vehicles with the Bose® sound system:
automatically adjusts the audio system to make up Vehicles with the Bose® sound system include Bose®
for road and wind noise, by increasing the volume AudioPilot® noise compensation technology. AudioPilot®
as vehicle speed increases. continuously adjusts the audio system equalization
For vehicles without the Bose® sound system: to compensate for background noise. This feature
is most effective at lower radio volume settings where
1. Set the volume at the desired level. background noise can affect how well the audio is heard.
At higher volume settings, there may be little or no
2. Press AUTO n to select AUTO VOLUME MIN
adjustments by AudioPilot®. For additional information
(minimum), AUTO VOLUME MED (medium), or
on AudioPilot®, visit [Link]/audiopilot.
AUTO VOLUME MAX (maximum). Each higher
setting provides more volume compensation To use AudioPilot®:
at faster vehicle speeds. 1. Set the volume at the desired level.
3. Press AUTO n until AUTO VOLUME OFF 2. Press AUTO n until AUTO VOLUME ON
displays to turn automatic volume off. displays.
3. Press AUTO n until AUTO VOLUME OFF
displays to turn off AudioPilot®.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-85
Using the Radio XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Radio Data System (RDS) XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
that broadcast RDS information. The station name or call XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
letters display while the radio is tuned to an RDS station. and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
This system relies upon receiving specific information subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM Radio
from these stations and works only when the information Online for when you are not in the vehicle. A service
is available. In rare cases, a radio station can broadcast fee is required to receive the XM service. For more
incorrect information that causes the radio features information, contact XM at [Link] or call
to work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and [Link] or
station. call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
With RDS, the radio can: Finding an FM/AM/XM Station
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming. BAND: Press to switch between FM1, FM2, AM, XM1
or XM2.
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies. O e (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
• Display messages from radio stations.
t SEEK u : Press to go to the previous or to the next
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements. station and stay there.
• Provide the time of day. The radio only stops at stations with a strong signal.
• Provide a program type (PTY) for current
programming. t SCAN u : Press and hold t or u for two seconds
until FREQUENCY SCAN displays. The radio goes
• Provide the name of the program being broadcast. to a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes on to
the next station. Press t or u again to stop scanning.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-86
To scan preset stations: Finding a Category (CAT) Station
Press and hold t or u for four seconds until PRESET
(XM Satellite Radio Service Only)
SCAN displays. The radio goes to the next preset station, To select an XM station by category:
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next preset 1. Press CAT. The last selected category displays.
station. Press t or u again or one of the pushbuttons
to stop scanning presets. 2. Turn the O e knob to select a category.
The radio only scans stations with a strong signal. 3. Press t or u to go to a category’s station.
SEEKING CATEGORY displays.
1-6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press to play stations that
are programmed to the radio preset pushbuttons. 4. To go to another station within that category,
press the CAT button to display the category,
Setting Preset Stations then press t or u to go to another station.
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM, If the radio cannot find the desired category, NONE
six XM1 and six XM2), and equalization settings for displays and the radio returns to the last station tuned.
each station can be programmed on the six numbered
pushbuttons. SCAN: To scan the stations within a category:
To set presets: 1. Press CAT. The last selected category displays.
1. Turn the radio on. 2. Turn the O e knob to select a category.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 3. Press and hold t or u until a beep sounds and
or XM2. SCAN CATEGORY displays. The radio begins
3. Tune in the desired station. scanning the stations in the category.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization. 4. Press t or u to stop scanning.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until the radio beeps once.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-87
Radio Messages If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message appears every three seconds. To scroll through
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): Displays if the radio is the message, press and release 4 . A new group of
no longer configured properly for the vehicle. The vehicle words display after every press of the button. Once
must be returned to your dealer/retailer for service. the complete message has displayed, INFO disappears
LOC (Locked): Displays when the THEFTLOCK® from the display until another new message is received.
system has locked up. The vehicle must be returned to The last message can be displayed by pressing this
your dealer/retailer for service. button. The last message until a new message is
received or the radio is tuned to a different station.
If any error occurs repeatedly or cannot be corrected,
contact your dealer/retailer. NO INFO displays when a message is not available from
a station.
RDS Messages
TRAF (Traffic): TA (traffic) displays when the station
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies. broadcasts traffic announcements, the announcement
When an alert announcement comes on the current will be played.
radio station, ALERT! displays. The announcement is
Press TRAF and the radio seeks to a station that
heard, even if the volume is low or a CD is playing.
broadcasts traffic announcements. When a station
If a CD is playing, play stops during the announcement.
is found, the radio stops seeking and TA displays.
Alert announcements cannot be turned off.
NO TRAFFIC INFO displays if a station that broadcasts
ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergency traffic announcements can not be found.
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
Press TRAF to turn off the traffic announcements if TA is
all RDS stations.
on the display.
4 (Information): If the current station has a message, The radio plays the traffic announcement even if the
INFO (information) displays. Press 4 to see the message. volume is low. The radio interrupts the play of a CD if the
The message can display the artist, song title, call in last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
phone numbers, etc. This function does not apply to XM Satellite Radio
Service.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-88
Radio Messages for XM Only Six-Disc CD Radio:
See XM Radio Messages on page 3-96 XM Radio If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
Messages later in this section for further detail. each CD displays.

Using the CD Player M (Load): Press to load CDs into the CD player.
The CD player can play smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single To insert one CD:
CDs with an adapter ring. 1. Press M.
A CD in the player it stays in the player when the
2. Load a CD and insert the CD partway into the
ignition is turned off. When the ignition or radio is
slot, label side up when INSERT CD # displays.
turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped,
The player pulls the CD in.
if it was the last selected audio source.
To insert multiple CDs:
Loading a CD
1. Press and hold M for two seconds. Two beeps
Single CD Radio: sound and LOAD ALL DISCS displays.
Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side up, until 2. Load a CD and insert the CD partway into the
the player pulls the CD in. The CD begins playing slot, label side up when INSERT CD # displays.
automatically. The player pulls the CD in.
The CD symbol displays when a CD is inserted, and 3. Wait for INSERT CD # to display after the previous
the track number displays when each new track starts CD is loaded, then load the next CD. The CD player
to play. takes up to six CDs.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs, press
the M button to cancel the loading function. The radio
begins to play the last CD loaded.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-89
Playing a CD AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press to
select the equalization setting while playing a CD.
O e (Tune): Turn to go to the next or previous track. The equalization is stored when a CD is played.
For more information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ”
{ (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse within the listed previously in this section.
current track.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
| (Fast Forward): Press and hold to fast forward playing. The inactive CD(s) remains inside the radio
for future listening.
through the current track.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when listening
t SEEK u : Press the left arrow to go to the start of to the radio. CD displays when a CD is in the player. If
the current track if more than eight seconds have played. your system has a remote playback device, pressing this
Press the right arrow to go to the start of the next track. button a second time allows the remote device to play.
If either arrow is held or pressed more than once, the
player continues moving backward or forward through X (Eject): Press to eject a CD from the Single CD
the CD. Radio and the Six-Disc CD Radio.
t SCAN u : To scan one CD, press and hold either Single CD Radio: Press X to eject a CD.
arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN displays and Six-Disc CD Radio:
a beep sounds. The radio goes to the next track, plays
for 10 seconds, then goes to the next track. Press either Press X to eject the CD that is currently playing.
arrow again, to stop scanning.
To eject multiple CDs:
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either arrow for
more than four seconds until SCAN displays and a beep 1. Press and hold X for two seconds. A beep sounds
sounds. Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds of the and EJECT ALL displays.
first track of each loaded CD. Press either arrow again, 2. The ejected CD can be removed when REMOVE
to stop scanning. DISC displays.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press the M or X .
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-90
The CD is automatically pulled back into the player if Single CD Radio:
the CD is not removed after 25 seconds. Pushing a CD Press and release RDM, until RANDOM DISC PLAY
back into the player, before the 25 second time period is displays. Press and release the RDM until RANDOM
complete causes the player to sense an error and the CD OFF displays to turn off random play.
player tries to eject the CD several times before stopping.
Six-Disc CD Radio:
Wait for the timer to expire before pressing X again.
• Press and release RDM until RANDOM DISC PLAY
Pressing X repeatedly after trying to push a CD displays to play the tracks on one CD in random
in manually causes the CD players 25-second eject order. Once all tracks on this disc have played,
timer to reset. RANDOM DISC PLAY will repeat.
RPT (Repeat): Press to hear a track or an entire CD • Press and release RDM until RANDOM ALL DISCS
over again. displays to play the tracks on all of the CDs that are
loaded in random order.
Single CD Radio:
• Press and release RDM until RANDOM OFF
Press RPT to hear a track over again, REPEAT displays to turn off random play.
displays. Press again to turn off repeat, REPEAT OFF
displays. R (Song List): The Song List feature can save
Six-Disc CD Radio: 20 track selections.
• Press RPT until REPEAT displays to repeat a track. To save tracks:
• Press RPT until REPEAT ONE DISC displays to 1. If S-LIST is displayed, press R to turn it off.
repeat an entire CD
2. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
• Press RPT until REPEAT OFF displays to turn off pushbutton and then use u or O e knob to
repeat. select the track to be saved.
RDM (Random): Press to hear the tracks in random, 3. Press and hold R until a beep sounds and
rather than sequential order, on one CD or all of ADDED SONG displays.
the loaded CDs.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to save other selections.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-91
SONGLIST FULL displays if more than 20 selections If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
are stored. tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the
To play tracks:
song list again are added to the bottom of the list.
1. Press R . One beep sounds and S-LIST displays.
To end song list mode, press R . One beep sounds
The recorded tracks begin to play in the order they
were saved and S-LIST is removed from the display.

2. Press t or u to go back or forward within the Care of CDs and the CD Player
saved tracks. Care of CDs
To delete tracks: Store CD(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The CD
1. Press R to turn song list on. S-LIST displays. player scans the bottom of the disc. If the bottom of a CD
2. Press t or u , use the O e knob to select the is damaged it may not play properly or at all. Do not touch
desired track to be deleted. the bottom of a CD while handling it. Pick up CDs by
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
3. Press and hold R until SONG REMOVED displays. the outer edge.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks If the surface of a CD is dirty, take a soft, lint free cloth
are moved up the list. When another track is added to or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
the song list, the track is added to the end of the list. solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure the
wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
To delete the entire song list:
1. Press the R button to turn song list on. S-LIST
displays.
2. Press and hold R for more than four seconds.
One beep sounds and SONGLIST EMPTY
displays to confirm that the song list has been
deleted.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-92
Care of the CD Player Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving
Do not add labels to a CD, it could get caught in the CD on page 4-2.
player. Use a marking pen to write on the top of the
CD if a description is needed. Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s
front auxiliary input jack to use a portable audio player.
Do not use CD lens cleaners, they could damage the The radio displays AUX INPUT DEVICE when a device
CD player. is connected and begins playing audio from that device.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than Top Knob (Power/Volume): Turn to increase or
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an decrease the volume of the portable player. Additional
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, volume adjustments can be made from the portable
the CD player could be damaged. While using the device.
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portable
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign audio device is playing. The portable audio device
materials, liquids, and debris. continues playing.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while a
section. portable audio device is playing. Press again and
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack the system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on connected, AUX INPUT DEVICE displays. If a portable
the right side of the faceplate. This is not an audio output; audio player is not connected, AUX INPUT DEVICE
do not plug the headphone set into the front auxiliary does not display.
input jack. An external audio device can be connected to
the auxiliary input jack for use as another source for audio
listening.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-93
Using an MP3 Supported Bit Rates
The following bit rates are supported: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,
MP3 Format 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,
Radios with the MP3 feature can only play CD-R discs. 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps,
Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on the and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate.
same disc. File Naming
Supported File Structure ID3v1 and ID3v2 tags are supported. The track name
Radios with the MP3 feature support up to: contained in the ID3 tag is shown on the display.
The display only shows up to 32 characters for track
• 50 folders. and file names.
• 11 folders in depth. If the track name is not contained in the ID3 tag, the
• 50 playlists. display shows the file name without the file extension.

• 255 files. Playlists

• 10 sessions. Playlists that do not have a .mp3 or .wpl extension may
not work.
Root Directory:
Preprogrammed playlists created by WinAmp™,
The root directory is treated as a folder. Files are stored MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software are
in the root directory when the disc or storage device supported and they cannot be edited using the radio.
does not contain folders. Files accessed from the root
directory display as F1 ROOT.
Empty Folder:
Folders that do not contain files are skipped, and the
player advances to the next folder that contains files.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-94
Playing an MP3 RDM (Random): Press to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential order, on one CD, one folder,
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. or all of the loaded CDs.
The player pulls it in, and READING displays. The CD
should begin playing and the CD symbol displays. Press and release RDM until:

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R in the • RANDOM DISC PLAY displays to play the tracks
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio on the CD in random order.
is turned on, the CD-R starts to play where it stopped, • RANDOM FOLDER displays to play the tracks in
if it was the last selected audio source. the folder in random order.
As each new track starts to play, the track number • RANDOM ALL DISCS displays to play the tracks on
displays. all of the CDs that are loaded in random order.
Order of Play • RANDOM OFF displays to turn off random play.
Tracks are played sequentially in the following order: RPT (Repeat): Press to hear a track, CD, or a folder
1. Playlists. over again.
2. Files contained in the root directory. Press and release RPT until:
3. Files contained in folders. • REPEAT displays to repeat a track.

O / e (Tune): Turn to go to the next or previous • REPEAT ONE DISC displays to repeat a CD.
track. • REPEAT FOLDER displays to repeat a folder.

{ (Previous Folder): Press to go to the first track in • REPEAT OFF displays to turn off repeated play.
the previous folder. Press and hold to reverse through the
current track.
t SEEK u : Press t to go to the start of the
current track, if more than eight seconds have played.
| (Next Folder): Press to go to the first track in the Press u to go to the next track. Press t or u more than
next folder. Press and hold to fast forward the current once to continue moving backward or forward through
track. the CD.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-95
4 (Information): Press to display the artist name and CH Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
album contained in the ID3 tag. received with your XM Subscription package.

BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is CH Unavail: This previously assigned channel is no
playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio for longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station
future listening. was one of the presets, choose another station for
that preset button.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when listening
to the radio. The CD symbol displays when a CD is No Info: No artist, song title, category, or text
loaded. information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
XM Radio Messages Not Found: There are no channels available for the
selected category. The system is working properly.
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked by calling XM Locked: The XM receiver in the vehicle may
1-800-852-XMXM (9696). have previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between
Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is being vehicles. If this message is received after having the
updated, and no action is required. This process should vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
take no longer than 30 seconds.
Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message will
No Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but the
alternate with the XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM signal.
This label is needed to activate the service.
When the vehicle is moved into an open area, the signal
should return. Unknown: If this message is received when tuned
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and to channel 0, there may be a receiver fault. Consult
processing audio and text data. No action is needed. with your dealer/retailer.
This message should disappear shortly. Chk XMRcvr: If this message does not clear within a
CH Off Air: This channel is not currently in service. short period of time, the receiver may have a fault.
Tune in to another channel. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-96
Navigation/Radio System Audio System
For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
separate Navigation System manual. comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers
and over-rides the audio system. Use the audio system
Bluetooth® volume knob, during a call, to change the volume level.
The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume level
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make is used if the volume is turned down too low.
and receive phone calls. The system can be used while
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. Bluetooth Controls
The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 30 ft. Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to
(9.1 m). Not all phones support all functions, and not operate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
all phones are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-108 for more
Bluetooth system. See [Link]/bluetooth for more information.
information on compatible phones.
Voice Recognition b g (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret recognition.
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum.
c (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a
call, or to cancel an operation.
The system may not recognize voice commands if
there is too much background noise.
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural
voice.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-97
Pairing Pairing a Phone
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not
connected, calls will be made using OnStar® Hands-Free 3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner’s guide for and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
more information. be used in Step 4.
Pairing Information: 4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
• Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle manufacturers user guide for information on
Bluetooth system. this process.
• The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is Locate the device named “General Motors” in the
moving. list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions
• The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number
with the first available paired cell phone in the order that was provided in Step 3.
the phone was paired. 5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use
• Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the a name that best describes the phone. This name
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
The system then confirms the name provided.
• Pairing should only need to be completed once, 6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
unless changes to the pairing information have been successfully paired” after the pairing process
been made or the phone is deleted. is complete.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a 7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
Different Phone later in this section. be paired.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-98
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone. “Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth 3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the “Please wait while I search for other phones”.
system will say “Is connected” after the connected • If another phone is found, the response will be
phone.
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
Deleting a Paired Phone • If another phone is not found, the original phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system remains connected.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. Storing Name Tags
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to OnStar systems.
delete followed by a tone.
The system uses the following commands to store and
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the retrieve phone numbers:
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds • Store
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>? • Digit Store
Yes or No” followed by a tone
• Directory
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-99
Using the Store Command 5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
The store command allows a phone number to be “About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
stored without entering the digits individually.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system “No” and repeat Step 5.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with the name tag is stored. After the number is
“Store, number please” followed by a tone. stored the system returns to the main menu.
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses. Using the Digit Store Command
• If the system recognizes the number it responds The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone number.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats the responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
number followed by “Please say yes or no”. If the 2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
number is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is not “Please say the first digit to store” followed by
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the a tone.
number to be re-entered. 3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
4. After the system stores the phone number, it repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed Continue entering digits until the number to be
by a tone. stored is complete.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-100
 4. After the complete number has been entered, say Deleting Name Tags
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone. The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with • Delete
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”. • Delete all name tags
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5. Using the Delete Command
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and The delete command allows specific name tags to be
the name tag is stored. After the number is deleted.
stored the system returns to the main menu. To use the delete command:
Using the Directory Command 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
by the system. To use the directory command: 2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete, <name
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with tag>? Please say yes or no”.
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system • If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
returns to the main menu. the name tag. The system responds with “OK,
deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu.”
• If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The system
responds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please say
the name tag.”

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-101
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command Using the Dial Command
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
(if present).
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
To use the delete all name tags command: <phone name>. “Number please” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system 3. Say the entire number without pausing.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. • If the system recognizes the number, it responds
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored • If the system does not recognize the number,
in your phone directory and your route destination
it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
say yes or no.”
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
• Say “Yes” to delete all name tags. If the number is not correct, say “No”. The system
• Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the will ask for the number to be re-entered.
main menu. Using the Digit Dial Command
Making a Call 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Calls can be made using the following commands:
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with
• Dial
“Digit dial using <phone name>, please say
• Digit Dial the first digit to dial” followed by a tone.
• Call 3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
• Re-dial heard followed by a tone.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-102
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be Once connected, the person called will be heard
dialed is complete. After the whole number has through the audio speakers.
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number. Using the Re-dial Command
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
last number.
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the last
system, say “Verify” at any time and the number called from the connected Bluetooth phone.
system will repeat them.
Once connected, the person called will be heard through
Using the Call Command the audio speakers.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Receiving a Call
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using When an incoming call is received, the audio system
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
by a tone. • Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it • Press c to ignore a call.
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed by
a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The
system responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>”
and dials the number. If the name tag is not
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the
name tag to be re-entered.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-103
Call Waiting Ending a Call
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone Press c to end a call.
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
• Press b g to answer an incoming call when Muting a Call
another call is active. The original call is placed During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can
on hold. be muted so that the person on the other end of the
• Press b g again to return to the original call. call cannot hear them.

• To ignore the incoming call, continue with the To Mute a call

original call with no action.
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
• Press c to disconnect the current call and switch followed by a tone.
to the call on hold. 2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with
Three-Way Calling “Call muted”.

Three-Way Calling must be supported on the To Cancel Mute

Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service 1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
carrier to work. followed by a tone.
1. While on a call press b g . The system responds 2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
with “Ready” followed by a tone. responds with “Resuming call”.
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.
Transferring a Call
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle
the third party to be called. Bluetooth system and the cell phone.

4. Once the call is connected, press b g to link all

the callers together.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-104
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone Voice Pass-Thru
During a call with the audio in the vehicle: Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready” commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
followed by a tone.
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone. 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
Bluetooth System “Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with 3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred. “OK, accessing <phone name>”.
The connection process can take up to two minutes after
the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY • The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will
position. go through its cycle according to the phone’s
operating instructions.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-105
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
Tones 1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and followed by a tone.
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is used 2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
when calling a menu driven phone system. Account “Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for
3. Say the name tag to send.
retrieval during menu driven calls.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
Sending a Number During a Call responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone. • If the system is not sure it recognized the
name tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system
3. Say the number to send. responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
• If the system clearly recognizes the number it the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-106
Clearing the System This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. 1. This device may not cause interference.
This includes all saved name tags in the phonebook 2. This device must accept any interference received,
and phone pairing information. For information on including interference that may cause undesired
how to delete this information, see the above sections operation of the device.
on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags. Changes or modifications to this system by other than
Other Information an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by
the Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Theft-Deterrent Feature
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective owners. THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
and LOCKED displays if the radio is stolen or moved
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. to a different vehicle.
2. This device must accept any interference received, When the when the ignition is in the off position, a
including interference that may cause undesired blinking red light on the upper left side of the radio
operation. indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-107
Audio Steering Wheel Controls c (Phone On Hook): Press to reject an incoming
call, or end a current call.

w x (Next/Previous): Press to change radio stations

or select tracks on a CD.
To change radio stations:
• Press w or x to go to the next or to the previous
radio station and stay there. The radio only seeks
stations with a strong signal that are in the
selected band.
• Press and hold w or x for two seconds until
SCAN displays and a beep sounds to scan stations.
For vehicles with steering wheel controls, some audio The radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel. then goes to the next station. Press again to stop
scanning.
b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to silence the vehicle • Press and hold w or x for four seconds until
speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on. PRESET SCAN displays and a beep sounds to
®
For vehicles with OnStar or Bluetooth systems press scan presets. The radio goes to a station, plays
for a few seconds, then goes to the next station.
and hold V g for longer than two seconds to interact
Press again to stop scanning.
with those systems. See OnStar® System on page 2-41
and Bluetooth® on page 3-97 in this manual for more
information.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-108
To select tracks on a CD: Radio Reception
• Press w or x to go to the next or to the previous
Frequency interference and static can occur during
track when a CD is playing.
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
• Press and hold w or x for more than two seconds chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
to scan the current CD. The CD goes to the next electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power
track, plays the first 10 seconds, then goes to outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item
the next track. Press again to stop scanning. from the accessory power outlet.
• Press and hold w or x for more than four seconds AM
to scan all of the CDs loaded. The CD goes to
the next CD, plays the first 10 seconds of each The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
track, then goes to the next CD. Press again to especially at night. The longer range can cause station
stop scanning. frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
+ e − e (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
the radio volume. night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press to play stations that happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
are programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.
FM Stereo
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles
(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in electronic
circuit that automatically works to reduce interference,
some static can occur, especially around tall buildings
or hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-109
XM™ Satellite Radio Service Diversity Antenna System
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception The AM-FM antenna is a hidden self tuning system.
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States, It optimizes the AM and FM signals relative to
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can the vehicle’s position and radio station source.
interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to No maintenance or adjustments are needed.
fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
loss of the XM signal for a period of time. XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
Cellular Phone Usage System
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the For vehicles with XM Satellite Radio Service, the
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when making antenna is located on the roof or on the trunk lid of
or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s battery, the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions
or simply having the phone on. This interference causes for clear radio reception.
an increased level of static while listening to the radio.
If static is received while listening to the radio, unplug
the cellular phone and turn it off.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-110
 Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ............4-2 Racing or Other Competitive Driving ................4-14
Driving for Better Fuel Economy .......................4-2 ZR1 Brake Burnish Procedure ........................4-15
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2 Driving at Night ............................................4-16
Drunk Driving .................................................4-3 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-17
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-3 Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-18
Braking .........................................................4-4 Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-18
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-5 Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-19
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-5 Winter Driving ..............................................4-20
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-6 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Active Handling System ...................................4-7 Ice, or Snow .............................................4-22
Limited-Slip Rear Axle .....................................4-9 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-22
Selective Ride Control .....................................4-9 Loading the Vehicle ......................................4-23
Steering ......................................................4-10 Towing ..........................................................4-28
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-12 Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-28
Passing .......................................................4-12 Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-28
Loss of Control .............................................4-12 Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-28

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Defensive Driving
the Vehicle Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is
to wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are
Driving for Better Fuel Economy for Everyone on page 1-9.
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
• Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
{ CAUTION:
• Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops. Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
• Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time. bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
• When road and weather conditions are appropriate,
might do and be ready. In addition:
use cruise control, if equipped.
• Allow enough following distance between you
• Always follow posted speed limits or drive more and the driver in front of you.
slowly when conditions require. • Focus on the task of driving.
• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated. Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
• Combine several trips into a single trip. injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Spec
number molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.
• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-2
Drunk Driving For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
{ CAUTION:
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your then drive.
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
driver who will not drink. person had not been drinking.

Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is Control of a Vehicle
a global tragedy.
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
attentiveness. more of those control systems than the tires and road can
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the vehicle.
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 and
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking Active Handling System on page 4-7.
and driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annual Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
the use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured. on page 5-3.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-3
Braking This is a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-40. with a lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic
and allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
of unnecessary braking. That means better braking and
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
longer brake life.
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a second.
driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes.
But that is only an average. It might be less with
If the brakes are pumped, the pedal could get harder to
one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more
push down. If the engine stops, there will still be some
with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
power brake assist but it will be used when the brake
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
is applied. Once the power assist is used up, it can
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
to push.
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between the Under certain weather or operating conditions,
vehicle and others is important. occasional brake squeak, squeal, or other noise might
be heard with the vehicle’s performance braking system.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
This brake system is designed for superior fade
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
resistance and consistent operation using high
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
performance brake pads. Brake noise and brake dust
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
are normal and do not affect system performance.
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force
applied. Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
on page 5-3.
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-4
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a
braking skid. As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps receiving
updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to accordingly.
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor
or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to get
on, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping
moves a little. This is normal. distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that
If there is a problem with vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough
ABS, this warning light room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS)
Using ABS
Warning Light on Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
page 3-41. down firmly and let antilock work. A motor or clicking
noise might be heard and the brake pedal might be felt
to move a little during a stop, but this is normal.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam Braking in Emergencies
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS: ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down. even the very best braking.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-5
Traction Control System (TCS) The SERVICE TRACTION
SYSTEM message and the
The vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) that TCS warning light will come
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery on if there is a problem with
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses TCS. See DIC Warnings
that the rear wheels are spinning too much or are and Messages on
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the page 3-56.
system works the rear brakes and reduces engine power
(by closing the throttle and managing engine spark) to
limit wheel spin.
The TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVE message displays
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when TCS
is limiting wheel spin. See DIC Warnings and Messages When this light and the SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM
on page 3-56. The system may be heard or felt while message are on, the system will not limit wheel spin.
it is working, but this is normal. Adjust your driving accordingly.
If cruise control is being used when TCS begins to TCS automatically comes on whenever the vehicle is
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically started. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery
disengage. Cruise control may be reengaged road conditions, the system should always be left on.
when road conditions allow. See Cruise Control on TCS can be turned off if needed.
page 3-10.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-6
 To turn the system off, Active Handling System
press the button located
on the console. The Active Handling System is a computer controlled
system that helps the driver maintain directional control
of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. This is
accomplished by selectively applying any one of the
vehicle’s brakes.
The ACTIVE HANDLING message will come on when the
system is operating. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-56 for more information. The system may be
heard or felt while it is working. This is normal.

The system can be turned on or off at any time by The SERVICE ACTIVE
pressing the ACTIVE HANDLING button. The DIC will HANDLING SYSTEM
display the appropriate message when the button is message will be displayed,
pushed. the instrument cluster light
will come on, and a sound
Notice: When traction control is turned off, or will be heard if there is a
Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible to problem with the system.
lose traction. If you attempt to shift with the drive
wheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is possible
to cause damage to the transmission. Do not attempt
to shift when the drive wheels do not have traction.
Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle is not
covered. See the warranty book for additional See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56 for
information. more information.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect When this light and the SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and SYSTEM message are on, the system is not
Modifications on page 5-3 for more information. operational. Adjust your driving accordingly.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-7
The Active Handling System comes on automatically If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system detects a flat
whenever the vehicle is started. To help maintain tire and the Driver Information Center (DIC) displays
directional control of the vehicle, the system should TIRE FLAT, or if the TPM system is malfunctioning and
always be left on. The system can be turned off needed. the DIC displays SERVICE TIRE MONITOR, the Active
If the Active Handling System is turned off, the Traction Handling System will be affected as follows:
Control System will also be turned off. Adjust your • The Active Handling System cannot be turned off by
driving accordingly.
the driver.
To turn the system • If the Active Handling System is off, it will be turned
off, press the ACTIVE on automatically.
HANDLING button on the
console for five seconds.
• Competitive Driving Mode is unavailable.
The system can be turned • The Active Handling System will feel different in
back on at any time by aiding and maintaining directional control.
pressing the button.
The DIC will display the Competitive Driving Mode
appropriate message when
the button is pushed. The driver can select this optional handling mode by
pressing the ACTIVE HANDLING button on the console
quickly two times. COMPETITIVE DRIVING MODE will
be displayed in the DIC. Competitive Driving Mode allows
the driver to have full control of the rear wheels while the
Active Handling System helps maintain directional control
of the vehicle by selective brake application. This involves
less intervention than with both the Active Handling
System and Traction Control Systems on. The Traction
Control System will not be operating. Adjust your driving
accordingly.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-8
 This light will be on when Limited-Slip Rear Axle
the vehicle is in the
Competitive Driving Mode. Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle can give more
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a
standard axle most of the time, but when traction is low,
this feature allows the drive wheel with the most traction
to move the vehicle.

Selective Ride Control

The vehicle may have a ride control system called
Magnetic Selective Ride Control. The system provides
When the ACTIVE HANDLING button is pressed again, the following performance benefits:
the Active Handling and Traction Control Systems • Reduced Impact Harshness
will be on. The TRACTION SYSTEM AND ACTIVE
HANDLING-ON message will be displayed briefly in • Improved Road Isolation
the DIC and a chime will be heard. • Improved High-Speed Stability
Notice: When traction control is turned off, or • Improved Handling Response
Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible to
lose traction. If you attempt to shift with the drive • Better Control of Body Ride Motions
wheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is possible
to cause damage to the transmission. Do not attempt
to shift when the drive wheels do not have traction.
Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle is not
covered. See the warranty book for additional
information.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-9
 This knob is located on the Steering
center console. Turn it to
select the suspension Power Steering
of your choice.
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops
or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.

Magnetic Speed Variable Assist

Steering System
This system continuously adjusts the effort felt when
TOUR: Use for normal city and highway driving. steering at all vehicle speeds. It provides ease when
This setting provides a smooth, soft ride. parking, yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds.
SPORT: Use where road conditions or personal Steering Tips
preference demand more control. This setting provides
more “feel”, or response to the road conditions. It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
The setting can be changed at any time. Based on road Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
conditions, steering wheel angle and the vehicle speed, and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
the system automatically adjusts to provide the best banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
handling while providing a smooth ride. The Tour and the one factor that can be controlled.
Sport modes will feel similar on a smooth road. Select If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
a new setting whenever driving conditions change. the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Three Driver Information Center (DIC) messages Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
(SERVICE RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS INOPERATIVE curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
and MAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH (129 KM/H) display accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
when a malfunction occurs with the Selective Ride gently into the straightaway.
Control system. Refer to DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-56 for more information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-10
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no
room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes. See Braking on page 4-4.
It is better to remove as much speed as possible from a
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and
a quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turned
a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the
object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-11
Off-Road Recovery Passing
The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
road onto the shoulder while driving. dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.

Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the Let us review what driving experts say about what
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the happens when the three control systems — brakes,
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
pavement. Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches, has asked.
8 to 13 cm, (about one-eighth turn) until the right front
tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
wheel to go straight down the roadway. and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-12
Skidding Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
those conditions. But skids are always possible. more limited.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the acceleration skid. If the traction control system is the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
off, then an acceleration skid is best handled by easing when you have any doubt.
your foot off the accelerator pedal. Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the avoid only the braking skid.
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for
a second skid if it occurs.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-13
Racing or Other Competitive Driving greater than 534°F (279°C). After conversion to the high
performance brake fluid, follow the brake fluid service
Racing or competitive driving may affect the vehicle recommendations outlined by the fluid manufacturer.
warranty. See the warranty book before using the Do not use silicone or DOT-5 brake fluids.
vehicle for racing or other competitive driving. If the vehicle is a ZO6 or ZR1 model or has the Z51
Notice: If you use the vehicle for racing or other performance package, it has greaseable outer ends on
competitive driving, the engine may use more oil than both of the rear toe-links. Under normal use, lubrication
it would with normal use. Low oil levels can damage should be performed as described in the maintenance
the engine. For information on how to add oil, see schedule. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
Engine Oil on page 5-19. and Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
If using the vehicle for racing, lubrication should be
Z06 and ZR1 Only: Be sure to check the oil level performed at the end of each racing day. See your
often during racing or other competitive driving and dealer/retailer for lubrication and make sure any needed
keep the level at or near the upper mark that shows repairs are made at once. Proper procedures for
the proper operating range on the engine oil dipstick. performing these services can be found in the service
Except Z06 and ZR1: Be sure to check the oil level manual. See Service Publications Ordering Information
often during racing or other competitive driving and on page 7-16.
keep the level at or near 1 quart (1 L) above the upper If the vehicle is used for racing or other competitive
mark that shows the proper operating range on the driving, the rear axle fluid temperatures may be higher
engine oil dipstick. After the competitive driving, than would occur in normal driving. We recommend
remove excess oil so that the level on the dipstick is that the rear axle fluid be drained and refilled with new
not above the upper mark that shows the proper fluid after every 24 hours of racing or competitive
operating range. driving. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
Z06 and ZR1 Only: For racing or competitive driving, it is page 6-12 for what fluid to use.
recommended that the brake fluid be replaced with a high
performance brake fluid that has a dry boiling point

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-14
ZR1 Brake Burnish Procedure Street High Performance Brake Burnishing
Procedure
Notice: These procedures are specific to the ZR1
with ceramic brake rotors. These procedures should Run this procedure in a safe manner and in compliance
not be run on other Corvette models as damage with all local and state ordinances/laws regarding
may result. motor vehicle operation. Run this procedure only on
dry pavement.
Notice: The new vehicle break-in period should
1. From a stop, accelerate as rapidly as possible
be completed before performing the brake
without activating traction control to a speed of
burnish procedure or damage may occur to the
60 mph (97 kph).
powertrain/engine. See New Vehicle Break-In
on page 2-21. 2. Use enough pedal force to completely stop the
vehicle in 4 to 5 seconds. If ABS activates,
When performed as instructed, these procedures will braking is too hard.
not damage the brakes. During the burnishing
procedure, the brake pads will smoke and produce an 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2, 50 times. This should take
odor. The braking force and pedal travel may increase. about 10 minutes.
After the procedure is complete, the brake pads may 4. After completing the 50 stops, cool the brakes by
appear white at the rotor contact. driving for 5 miles (8 km) at 60 mph (97 kph).
As with all high performance brake systems, some
amount of brake squeal is normal.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-15
Racing/Track Brake Burnish Procedure Driving at Night
To prepare the ZR1 brake system for track events and Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because
racing, the Street High Performance Brake Burnish some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or
as described previously should be completed. drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
In addition to completing the Street High Performance Night driving tips include:
Brake Burnishing Procedure, the following additional • Drive defensively.
procedure needs to be completed to make the
ZR1 brake system ready for track events and racing. • Do not drink and drive.
This procedure should only be run on a track and only • Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
on dry pavement. rearview mirror.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
Notice: Brake pedal fade will occur during this track other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
burnish procedure and can cause brake pedal travel so much road ahead.
and force to increase. This could extend stopping
distance until the brakes are fully burnished. • Watch for animals.
1. Drive a normal first lap and not too aggressive.
• When tired, pull off the road.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
2. Laps 2 and 3 should be gradually driven faster and
more aggressive, while allowing for reduced brake • Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
output and increased stopping distance due to • Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
brake fade. clean — inside and out.
3. Lap 4 as near to full speed, while allowing for • Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
reduced brake output and increased stopping curves.
distance due to brake fade. No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But, as
4. Laps 5 and 6 should be cool down laps. we get older, these differences increase. A 50-year-old
5. Lap 7 should be normal driving or an easy out lap. driver might need at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-16
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Hydroplaning
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid water. This can happen if the road is wet enough
driving through large puddles and deep-standing and you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
or flowing water. hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
{ CAUTION:
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling include:
to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
• Allow extra following distance.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
• Pass with caution.
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until
the brakes work normally. • Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. • Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Driving through flowing water could cause your • Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you and on page 5-62.
other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore
• Turn off cruise control.
police warnings and be very cautious about trying to
drive through flowing water.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-17
Before Leaving on a Long Trip Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing. while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows Other driving tips include:
clean — inside and outside? • Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Wiper Blades: In good shape? • Keep interior temperature cool.
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked? • Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean? and to the sides.

• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to

• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-18
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different { CAUTION:
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include: Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition
• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape. off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they could get so hot
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
that they would not work well. You would then
system, and transmission.
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a You could crash. Always have the engine running
lower gear. and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.

{ CAUTION: • Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut

across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then • Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
have poor braking or even none going down a hill. lane (stalled car, accident).
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine • Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope. area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-19
Winter Driving The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-5 improves
vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads, but
Driving on Snow or Ice apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be maneuvers and braking while on ice.
treated with salt or sand.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly Blizzard Conditions
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction. Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.
under the tires even more. To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:

The Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 • Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
improves the ability to accelerate on slippery roads, • Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
but slow down and adjust your driving to the road
conditions. The Active Handling System on page 4-7
might also activate. When driving through deep
snow, turn off the traction control system to help
maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-20
 CAUTION: (Continued)
{ CAUTION:
For more information about carbon monoxide,
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle. see Engine Exhaust on page 2-36.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
unconsciousness and even death. to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
• Clear away snow from around the base of around the base of your vehicle, especially any
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking that is blocking the exhaust.
the exhaust pipe.
• Check again from time to time to be sure
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
snow does not collect there.
keep warm, but be careful.
• Open a window about two inches (5 cm) on
the side of the vehicle that is away from the To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
wind to bring in fresh air. needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you
instrument panel.
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting to keep warm also helps.
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting. If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
See Climate Control System in the Index. when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal
slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed.
CAUTION: (Continued) This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and
to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as little as
possible to save fuel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-21
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Mud, Ice, or Snow Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the
area around the front wheels. Turn the traction control
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the system off. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-22. as possible. For a manual transmission, shift slowly
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to between either 1 (First) or 2 (Second) and R (Reverse),
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction system allowing the wheels to stop before shifting into gear.
in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction system To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels
to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off and use stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the
the rocking method. accelerator pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear.
Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse
{ CAUTION: directions causes a rocking motion that could free
the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after a
few tries, it might need to be towed out. If the vehicle
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed, does need to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle
they can explode, and you or others could be on page 4-28.
injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin the
wheels as little as possible and avoid going above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.

For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,

see Tire Chains on page 5-85.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-22
Loading the Vehicle Tire and Loading Information Label
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label and the Certification label.

{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Label Example
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
your vehicle handles. These could cause you label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar) of
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading your vehicle. With the driver’s door open, you
can shorten the life of the vehicle. will find the label attached below the door latch.
This label shows the number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity
weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-23
For more information on tires and inflation see 4. The resulting figure equals the available
Tires on page 5-62 and Inflation - Tire Pressure amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
on page 5-71. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
There is also important loading information on the 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
vehicle Certification label. It tells you the Gross passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle available cargo and luggage load capacity is
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle. 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
See “Certification Label” later in this section. 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit That weight may not safely exceed the
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of available cargo and luggage load capacity
occupants and cargo should never exceed calculated in Step 4.
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver from your trailer will be transferred to your
and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
vehicle. this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. to tow a trailer.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-24
 Example 1 Example 2

Item Description Total Item Description Total

Vehicle Capacity Vehicle Capacity
A Weight for 400 lbs (181 kg) A Weight for 400 lbs (181 kg)
Example 1 = Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant Subtract Occupant
B Weight @ 150 lbs 150 lbs (68 kg) B Weight @ 150 lbs 300 lbs (136 kg)
(68 kg) x 1 = (68 kg) x 2 =
C Available Occupant 250 lbs (113 kg) C Available Cargo 100 lbs (45 kg)
and Cargo Weight = Weight =

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-25
 positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s capacity weight.
Certification Label

Example 3

Item Description Total

Vehicle Capacity
A Weight for 400 lbs (181 kg)
Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
B Weight @ 200 lbs 400 lbs (181 kg)
(91 kg) x 2 = A vehicle specific Certification label is attached
Available Cargo to the rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you
C Weight = 0 lbs (0 kg) the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceed the
Information label for specific information about GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-26
Do not load your vehicle with more weight than it If you put things inside your vehicle — like
was designed to carry. See “Steps for Determining suitcases, tools, packages or anything else — they
Correct Load Limit” earlier in this section. will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have
to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they
will keep going.
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
{ CAUTION:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
vehicle can break, and it can change the way in a crash.
your vehicle handles. These could cause you • Put things in the rear area of your
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
can shorten the life of the vehicle. • Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause • Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle. in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-27
Towing Recreational Vehicle Towing
Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy towing the vehicle
Towing Your Vehicle may cause damage because of reduced ground
clearance. Always put the vehicle on a flatbed truck
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed or trailer.
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your dealer/
The vehicle was neither designed nor intended to be
retailer or a professional towing service if the disabled
towed with any of its wheels on the ground. If the vehicle
vehicle must be towed. See Roadside Assistance
must be towed, see “Towing Your Vehicle” earlier in
Program on page 7-7.
this section.

Towing a Trailer
The vehicle is neither designed nor intended to tow a
trailer.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-28
 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3 Engine Coolant .............................................5-34
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3 Engine Overheating .......................................5-39
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-4 Overheated Engine Protection
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-4 Operating Mode .........................................5-41
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4 Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-41
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-42
Vehicle ......................................................5-5 Brakes ........................................................5-43
Fuel ................................................................5-5 Battery ........................................................5-49
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5 Jump Starting ...............................................5-50
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-6 Rear Axle .......................................................5-54
California Fuel ...............................................5-6 Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-55
Additives .......................................................5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-8 Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-56
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ............5-56
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-11 Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-56
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and Parking
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-12 Lamps .....................................................5-57
Hood Release ..............................................5-13 Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............5-58
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-14 Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-59
Engine Oil ...................................................5-19
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-26 Windshield Replacement .................................5-59
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-28 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-59
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-31 Tires ..............................................................5-62
Manual Transmission Fluid .............................5-31 Winter Tires .................................................5-63
Hydraulic Clutch ...........................................5-31 Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-64
Cooling System (Engine) ................................5-32 Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-66
Cooling System (Intercooler) ...........................5-33 Run-Flat Tires ..............................................5-69
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-1
 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-71 Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-95
High-Speed Operation ...................................5-72 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-96
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-73 Finish Care ..................................................5-96
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-75 Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-97
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-77 Removable Roof Panel ..................................5-98
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-77 Convertible Top ............................................5-98
Buying New Tires .........................................5-78 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels and Trim ...5-99
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-80 Tires .........................................................5-100
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-80 Finish Damage ...........................................5-100
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-82 Underbody Maintenance ...............................5-100
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-82 Fiberglass Springs (Composite Springs) ..........5-100
Tire Chains ..................................................5-85 Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................5-101
Lifting the Vehicle .........................................5-86 Vehicle Identification .....................................5-101
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-90 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-101
Appearance Care ............................................5-91 Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-102
Interior Cleaning ...........................................5-91 Electrical System ..........................................5-102
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-93 Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-102
Coated Moldings ...........................................5-94 Headlamp Wiring ........................................5-102
Leather .......................................................5-94 Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-103
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-103
Plastic Surfaces ........................................5-94 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-103
Cargo Cover and Convenience Net .................5-94 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........................5-103
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-95 Engine Compartment Fuse Block ...................5-106
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-95
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-110

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2
Service Accessories and Modifications
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer. When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and to the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
supported service people. safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,
ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,
traction control, and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause malfunction or damage
not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, are not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/
retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 1-56.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive { CAUTION:
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and You can be injured and the vehicle could be
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
these chemicals.
without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
California Perchlorate Materials experience, the proper replacement parts,
Requirements and tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
Certain types of automotive applications, such as • Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters, can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling are used, parts can later break or fall off.
may be necessary. For additional information, see You could be hurt.
[Link]/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
Fuel
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
the proper service manual, see Service Publications proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the
Ordering Information on page 7-16. engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance,
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-56. The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the shows the code letter or number that identifies the
mileage and the date of any service work performed. vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
See Maintenance Record on page 6-16. instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 5-101.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Gasoline Octane
the Vehicle
If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code W),
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can rating of 91 or higher. You can also use regular unleaded
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance. gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but the vehicle’s
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment acceleration could be slightly reduced, and you might
to the outside of the vehicle. notice a slight audible knocking noise, commonly
referred to as spark knock. If the octane is less than 87,
you might notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-5
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher Gasoline Specifications
as soon as possible. Otherwise, you could damage the
engine. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in
service. Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code R) or the additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
7.0L V8 engine (VIN Code E), use premium unleaded tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of
gasoline with a posted octane rating of 91 or higher. For gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-7 for
best performance, use premium unleaded gasoline with a additional information.
posted octane rating of 93. In an emergency, you can use
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or California Fuel
higher. If 87 octane fuel is used, do not perform any
aggressive driving maneuvers such as wide open throttle If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
applications. You might also hear audible spark knock Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
during acceleration. Refill the tank with premium fuel as California specifications. See the underhood emission
soon as possible to avoid damaging the engine. If you are control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
using gasoline rated at 91 octane or higher and you hear California emissions standards, the vehicle will operate
heavy knocking, the engine needs service. satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance might be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-44. If this occurs, return to your
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-6
Additives Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
are now required to contain additives that help prevent if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
the emission control system to work properly. In most more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. were not designed for those fuels.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
That damage would not be covered under the
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
vehicle warranty.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
low emissions can contain an octane-enhancing
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is
buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.
the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-7
We recommend against the use of such gasolines. Filling the Tank
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs
and the performance of the emission control system
could be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp might
turn on. If this occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for { CAUTION:
service.
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
Fuels in Foreign Countries cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
If you plan on driving in another country outside the the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
be covered by the vehicle warranty. from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
country where you will be driving. pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-8
 The fuel door release
button is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel. Push
the button to release the
fuel door.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel

door on the driver side of the vehicle.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-9
 There is also a manual
fuel door release tab.
It is located against the { CAUTION:
upper trim in the rear
compartment on the driver Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
side of the vehicle. Pull the too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
tab to release the fuel door.
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
While refueling, let the cap hang by the tether below Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
the fuel fill opening. tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible.
See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-95.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-10
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it Filling a Portable Fuel Container
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on { CAUTION:
page 3-44.
The CHECK GAS CAP message displays on the Driver Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the
Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not properly vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
page 3-56 for more information. badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
{ CAUTION: • Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or on
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not remove any surface other than the ground.
the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off • Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
the pump or by notifying the station attendant. of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Leave the area immediately. Contact should be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get • Do not use a cellular phone while
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one for pumping fuel.
you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage the fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-44.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-11
Checking Things Under
the Hood { CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
{ CAUTION: start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
injure you even when the engine is not running.
that will burn onto a hot engine.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-12
Hood Release
To open the hood:
1. Pull the hood release
lever with this symbol
on it. It is located inside
the vehicle below the
instrument panel on the
driver side.

2. Go to the side of the vehicle and pull up on the rear

edge of the hood, near the windshield.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then, just pull the hood down and
close it firmly.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-13
Engine Compartment Overview
If your vehicle has the 6.2L LS3 V8 engine and you are facing the front, when you open the hood, here is what you
will see:

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-14
A. Clutch Master Cylinder Reservoir (If Equipped). G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
See Hydraulic Clutch on page 5-31. under Engine Oil on page 5-19.
B. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid under Engine Oil on page 5-19.
on page 5-42. I. Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-106.
C. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under J. Passenger Compartment Air Filter (Out of View).
Brakes on page 5-43. See Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-31.
D. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Engine K. Battery on page 5-49.
Coolant on page 5-34.
E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-28.
F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-41.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-15
If your vehicle has the 6.2L LS9 Supercharged V8 engine and you are facing the front, when you open the hood,
here is what you will see:

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-16
A. Intercooler. See Cooling System (Engine) on G. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
page 5-32 or Cooling System (Intercooler) on Brakes on page 5-43.
page 5-33. H. Passenger Compartment Air Filter (Out of View).
B. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-28. See Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-31.
C. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir and Cap. See Power I. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
Steering Fluid on page 5-41. under Engine Oil on page 5-19.
D. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Engine J. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
Coolant on page 5-34. under Engine Oil on page 5-19.
E. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding K. Remote Positive (+) Terminal (Out of View).
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid See Jump Starting on page 5-50.
on page 5-42. L. Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-106.
F. Clutch Master Cylinder Reservoir (If Equipped).
See Hydraulic Clutch on page 5-31.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-17
If your vehicle has the 7.0L LS7 V8 engine and you are facing the driver side of the vehicle, when you open the
hood, here is what you will see:

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-18
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-28. Engine Oil
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-41. Checking Engine Oil
C. Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-106. (Except ZO6 and ZR1)
D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal (Out of View).
See Jump Starting on page 5-50. If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), check the engine oil
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil” level right away. For more information, see Driver
under Engine Oil on page 5-19. Information Center (DIC) on page 3-50. Check the
F. Dry Sump Engine Oil Tank. See “Changing Engine engine oil level regularly; this is an added reminder.
Oil and Filter (Z06 Only)” Engine Oil on page 5-19. It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-19. be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
H. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Engine The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
Coolant on page 5-34. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid 1. Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes
on page 5-42. to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the
J. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
Brakes on page 5-43.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a lint-free paper
K. Clutch Master Cylinder Reservoir. See Hydraulic towel or a cloth, then push it back in all the way.
Clutch on page 5-31.
3. Remove the dipstick again, keeping the tip down
and read the level on the cross-hatched area. Oil
levels that fall in the cross-hatched area are normal.
4. Push the dipstick back in all the way.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-19
When to Add Engine Oil Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
(Except ZO6 and ZR1) cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.

See Engine Compartment

Overview on page 5-14 for
the location of the engine
oil fill cap.

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the

dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the recommended
oil. This section explains what kind of oil to use. For
engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-110.
See Racing or Other Competitive Driving on page 4-14 Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
for additional information on engine oil. operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when through.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-20
Checking Engine Oil (ZO6 and ZR1) The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
The dipstick is located on the dry sump engine oil tank.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14
for the location of the dry sump engine oil tank.
These vehicles have a racetrack-ready dry sump
engine lubrication system. This high-performance system
operates differently than a standard engine lubrication
system and requires a special procedure when checking
the engine oil level. Follow this procedure closely when
checking the engine oil level.
The engine oil level must be checked when the engine is
warm. Cold oil level in the dry sump tank may not indicate
the actual amount of oil in the system. With this system,
engine oil is contained in an external tank, separate
from the engine. Under normal operating conditions,
the oil pan under the engine does not store any oil.

A. Engine Oil Dipstick

B. Engine Oil Fill Cap
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-21
If the vehicle has been parked for an extended period 3. Wait at least five minutes (but not more than
without the engine being started, some oil will seep back 20 minutes) to allow oil to drain and settle in
into the oil pan, reducing the amount of oil held in the dry the engine.
sump tank and there could be no engine oil at all showing 4. Remove the dipstick from the external engine oil
on the dipstick. This is normal since the dipstick is tank and clean it with a lint-free paper towel or a
designed to read engine oil level only after the engine has cloth. Re-insert the dipstick into the external oil tank,
run long enough to reach normal operating temperature. pushing it all the way in until it stops.
Do not add engine oil based on cold engine dipstick
readings. The engine oil level on the dipstick will also be 5. Remove the dipstick from the oil tank and read the
inaccurate if checked while the engine is running. level on the cross-hatched area. Oil levels that fall
in the cross-hatched area are normal.
1. To obtain an accurate engine oil level reading,
warm up the engine to at least 175°F (80°C).
Cold oil will not give a correct oil level reading.
2. Once the engine is warm, turn off the engine.
Checking the oil while the engine is running
will result in an incorrect oil level reading.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-22
When to Add Engine Oil (ZO6 and ZR1) See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-14 for
the location of the external
engine oil tank and fill cap.

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the

tip of the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil through the oil fill cap opening in Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
the oil tank. This section explains what kind of oil to use. operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and into the oil tank when through.
Specifications on page 5-110.
Changing Engine Oil and Filter
See Racing or Other Competitive Driving on page 4-14
for additional information on engine oil. (ZO6 and ZR1)
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine These vehicles have a racetrack-ready dry sump engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the lubrication system. This high-performance system
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating operates differently than a standard engine lubrication
range, the engine could be damaged. system and requires a special procedure when changing
the engine oil and filter. Follow this procedure closely
when changing the engine oil and filter.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-23
 2. Once the oil has been drained from the engine,
remove the engine oil filter and allow the oil to
drain.
3. Re-install both drain plugs and tighten them to
18 lb ft (25 Y ).
4. Replace the oil filter and tighten it to 18 lb ft
(25 Y ). See Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 6-14 for the correct filter.
5. Oil is filled through the opening in the top of the
external engine oil tank. Remove the oil fill cap.
6. Add 10.5 quarts (9.9 L) of oil to the oil tank.
See Capacities and Specifications on page 5-110.
7. Install the oil fill cap and insert the dipstick, if
removed.
8. Start the engine and let it run at idle for at least
15 seconds. This will circulate the fresh engine
ZO6 Shown, ZR1 Similar
oil through the lubrication system.
A. Engine Oil Drain Plugs 9. Shut off the engine and check the oil level as
B. Seals described under “Checking Engine Oil (ZO6
and ZR1).”
1. Remove the two engine oil drain plugs from the
bottom of the engine oil pan. One drain plug
drains the external oil tank via the oil transfer supply
line. The other drain plug drains residual oil from
the crankcase sump. Allow the oil to drain.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-24
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Notice: Using oils that do not have the GM4718M
Standard designation can cause engine damage not
Look for three things: covered by the vehicle warranty.
• SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).

This vehicle’s engine was filled at the factory with a

Mobil 1® synthetic oil meeting all requirements for this
• GM4718M vehicle.
This vehicle’s engine requires a special oil Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
meeting GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
standard may be identified as synthetic. However, might not be available. You can add substitute oil
not all synthetic oils will meet this GM standard. designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M. temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-25
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil Z06 and ZR1 models have a racetrack-ready dry sump
engine lubrication system. This high-performance system
Flushes operates differently than a standard engine lubrication
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils system and requires a special procedure when changing
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard the engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-19.
GM4718M are all that is needed for good performance When the system has calculated that oil life has been
and engine protection. diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on. Change
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle the oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
warranty. (1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under the best
conditions, the oil life system might not indicate that an oil
change is necessary for over a year. However, the engine
Engine Oil Life System oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
When to Change Engine Oil has trained service people who will perform this work
using genuine parts and reset the system. It is also
This vehicle has a computer that indicates when to
important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the
change the engine oil and filter. This is based on engine
proper level.
revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage.
Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
change is indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
system to work properly, the system must be reset every change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
time the oil is changed. the oil is changed.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-26
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life What to Do with Used Oil
System Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
message being turned on, reset the system. warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message after an Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
oil change: change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
1. Press the TRIP button so the OIL LIFE percentage the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
is displayed. streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
2. Press RESET and hold for two seconds. OIL LIFE place that collects used oil.
REMAINING 100% will appear.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back on
when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-27
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter. Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace them at the first oil change after
Notice: If you spray water into the engine air each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
cleaner/filter intake and water enters the engine Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If
air cleaner/filter housing, you could damage your you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
vehicle’s engine. The repairs would not be covered at each engine oil change.
by your warranty. Do not spray water into the
engine air cleaner/filter intake and/or housing. How to Inspect the Engine Air
If you are cleaning the vehicle with the hood open, take Cleaner/Filter
care not to spray water directly near the filter opening To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from the
of the air cleaner, as shown in the illustration, as vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust
this could damage the vehicle’s engine. and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter is
required.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-28
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter:

6.2 L LS9 Engine shown, 7.0 L LS7 Engine similar

6.2 L LS3 Engine
1. Remove the screws holding the air cleaner
assembly.
2. Pull the air cleaner assembly back to gain access
to the filter element.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-29
 { CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can

cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
3. Remove the screws holding the filter element in into the engine, which will damage it. Always have
place. the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
4. Inspect or replace the filter. See Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 6-14.
5. Reverse Steps 1 and 3 to replace the air
cleaner/filter cover.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-30
Automatic Transmission Fluid Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure
How to Check Automatic Transmission to use the fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-12.
Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. Manual Transmission Fluid
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer It is not necessary to check the manual transmission fluid
service department and have it repaired as soon as level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
possible. loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your dealer/
retailer service department and have it repaired as soon
There is a special procedure for checking and changing as possible. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
the transmission fluid. Because this procedure is difficult, on page 6-12 for the proper fluid to use.
you should have this done at your dealer/retailer service
department. Contact your dealer/retailer for additional
information or the procedure can be found in the service Hydraulic Clutch
manual. To purchase a service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-16. It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding fluid
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission will not correct a leak. A fluid loss in this system could
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and
may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty. repaired.
Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-31
When to Check and What to Use Cooling System (Engine)
The hydraulic clutch fluid The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the
reservoir cap has this correct working temperature.
symbol on it. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-14 for reservoir
location.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper fluid

to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12. The fluid requires changing every two years.
See Additional Required Services on page 6-6.

How to Check and Add Fluid 7.0L Engine shown, 6.2L Engine similar
Visually check the clutch fluid reservoir to make sure the A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
fluid level is at the MIN (minimum) line on the side of the
reservoir. The hydraulic clutch fluid system should be B. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
closed and sealed.
Do not remove the cap to check the fluid level or to top-off
the fluid level. Remove the cap only when necessary to
add the proper fluid until the level reaches the MIN line.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-32
 Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
{ CAUTION: corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 miles)
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
start up even when the engine is not running and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
the vehicle.
away from any underhood electric fan.

Cooling System (Intercooler)

The 6.2L LS9 supercharged V8 engine has an
{ CAUTION: intercooler cooling system. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-14 for location of the intercooler.
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, The intercooler cooling system has a special procedure
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you for draining and adding coolant. Because this procedure
can be burned. is difficult, see your dealer/retailer for service if the
intercooler is low on coolant. The procedure can also be
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run found in the service manual. To purchase a service
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. on page 7-16.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-33
Checking Coolant 3. Loosen, but do not completely unscrew the bleeder
valve to check for coolant in the system.
4. Tighten the bleeder valve if there is coolant flowing
out of the bleeder valve.
5. If there is no coolant flowing out of the bleeder
valve, there could be a leak in the system.
Tighten the bleeder valve and contact your
dealer/retailer for service.

Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
The following explains the cooling system and how to
1. Verify that the engine and intercooler are no check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a
longer hot. problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 5-39.
2. Place a cloth to absorb possible coolant loss under
the driver’s side bleeder valve (A).

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-34
What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
{ CAUTION: • Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
outside temperature.
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can • Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid engine temperature.
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant • Protects against rust and corrosion.
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system • Will not damage aluminum parts.
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get • Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
too hot but would not get the overheat warning. Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
The engine could catch fire and you or others the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant. warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could be
damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine
coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12 for more information.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-35
Checking Coolant When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
the FULL COLD mark on the coolant surge tank.
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level. When the engine is hot, the level could be higher
than the FULL COLD line. If the coolant is below the
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank. FULL COLD line when the engine is hot, there could
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, be a leak in the cooling system.
do not do anything else until it cools down. If coolant
is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the If the coolant is low, add the coolant or take the vehicle
FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, to a dealer/retailer for service.
drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant at the coolant How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
recovery tank, but be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done. See Engine Coolant on page 5-34 Surge Tank
for more information.

The engine coolant { CAUTION:

surge tank is located
toward the rear of the
engine compartment on the You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
driver side of the vehicle. engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
See Engine Compartment and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Overview on page 5-14 for Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
more information on
location.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-36
 { CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the coolant surge
tank pressure cap — even a little — they can
come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when
the cooling system, including the coolant surge
tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
system and coolant surge tank pressure cap to
cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL® 1. When the cooling system, including the coolant
coolant mixture directly to the surge tank, but be sure surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator
the cooling system is cool before this is done. hose, is no longer hot, remove the pressure cap.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one-quarter turn and then stop.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and remove it.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-37
 3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper 4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
DEX-COOL coolant mixture until the level inside the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
stabilizes at the FULL COLD mark on the front radiator hose getting hot. Any time during this
of the surge tank. procedure, watch out for the engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level stabilizes at the FULL COLD mark
on the coolant surge tank.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-38
 5. Replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
cap is hand-tight and fully seated. help right away. See Roadside Assistance Program
Check the level in the surge tank when the system on page 7-7.
has cooled down. If the coolant is not at the proper If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
level, repeat Steps 1 through 4, then reinstall the is parked on a level surface.
pressure cap. If the coolant is not at the proper level
when the system cools down again, see your Then check to see if the engine cooling fan is running.
dealer/retailer. If the engine is overheating, the fan should be running.
If it is not, do not continue to run the engine and have the
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, vehicle serviced.
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured. Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode
Engine Overheating on page 5-41 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine
overheating. Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving
with no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.
There is an engine coolant temperature gage on
The costly repairs would not be covered by the
the instrument panel cluster. See Engine Coolant
vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Temperature Gage on page 3-43. The vehicle may also
Operating Mode on page 5-41 for information on
display a COOLANT OVER TEMPERATURE message
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
on the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-56 for more
information.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-39
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
{ CAUTION: If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you when the vehicle:
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away • Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the • Stops after high-speed driving.
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign • Idles for long periods in traffic.
of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of steam:
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is 1. Turn the air conditioning off.
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it 2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
necessary.
engine is cool.
3. If in a traffic jam, shift to N (Neutral) while stopped.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode If it is safe to do so, pull off the road, shift to
on page 5-41 for information on driving to a safe P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let the engine idle.
place in an emergency.
If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays,
the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the vehicle
slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle distance
from the car in front of you. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-40
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
vehicle right away. protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oil
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down. Also,
life system. See Engine Oil on page 5-19.
see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”
next in this section.
Power Steering Fluid
Overheated Engine Protection
See Engine Compartment
Operating Mode Overview on page 5-14 for
reservoir location.
This emergency operating mode lets the vehicle
be driven to a safe place, up to 50 miles (80 km),
in an emergency situation. If an overheated engine
condition exists and the messages COOLANT OVER
TEMPERATURE and REDUCED ENGINE POWER are
displayed, along with the check engine light, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
there is a significant loss in power and engine
performance.
Driving extended distances in the overheat protection When to Check Power Steering Fluid
mode should be avoided.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you
hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could
indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and
repaired.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-41
How to Check Power Steering Fluid What to Use
To check the power steering fluid: To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
1. Turn the ignition off and let the engine compartment Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
cool down. Always use the proper fluid.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean. Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a the vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluid
clean rag. listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. on page 6-12.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick. There are markings on both sides of Windshield Washer Fluid
the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. What to Use
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the When the vehicle needs windshield washer fluid, be
level up to the mark. sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use.
If the vehicle will be operating in an area where the
When the engine
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that
compartment is hot, the
has sufficient protection against freezing.
level should be at the HOT
mark. When the engine
compartment is cool,
the level should be at
the FULL COLD mark.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-42
Adding Washer Fluid Brakes
Open the cap with the Brake Fluid
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the The brake master cylinder
tank is full. See Engine reservoir is filled with
Compartment Overview on DOT 3 brake fluid. See
page 5-14 for reservoir Engine Compartment
location. Overview on page 5-14 for
the location of the reservoir.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as the reservoir might go down:
well as washer fluid. • The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid the fluid level goes back up.
expansion if freezing occurs, which could • A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
damage the tank if it is completely full. cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s or later the brakes will not work well.
windshield washer system and paint.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-43
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not Checking Brake Fluid
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are worn,
there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir.
installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14.
when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. The fluid level should be above the MIN mark on the
reservoir. If it is not, have the brake hydraulic system
checked to see if there is a leak.
{ CAUTION: After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make
sure the level is between the MIN and MAX marks.
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on
the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. What to Add
You or others could be burned, and the vehicle Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container.
could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
work is done on the brake hydraulic system. Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
See “Checking Brake Fluid” in this section. area around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check the brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-44
 Brake Wear (Except ZR1)
{ CAUTION: This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid. the brake pedal firmly.

Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
{ CAUTION:
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brake hydraulic system can damage brake the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an
hydraulic system parts so badly that they will accident. When the brake wear warning sound is
have to be replaced. Do not let someone put in heard, have the vehicle serviced.
the wrong kind of fluid.
• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. pads could result in costly brake repair.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
Your Vehicle on page 5-95. squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-45
Brake Wear (ZR1 Only)
The ZR1 model does not have built-in brake pad wear
indicators and periodic visual inspection of the brake
pads is required to determine when to replace the
brake pads.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
• Make sure that the brakes have been given
sufficient time to cool and then set the park brake.

The ZR1 also has an electronic brake pad wear sensor

system. When pads are worn, the CHANGE BRAKE
PADS message displays in the Driver Information
Center. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
Rear Front axle sets.
• Brake pads can be visually inspected through the
wheel by inspecting the outer brake pads at each
wheel.
• Brake pads should be replaced when worn to
two mm of pad thickness. New pads are 10 mm thick.
• In addition, brake pad inspection is required any time
the tires are removed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-46
Brake Rotor Wear Notice: Rotors may be chipped if hard contact is
made with the wheel during wheel installation or
ZR1 models have ceramic brake rotors. Rotors should removal. Always use the rotor protectors. Be sure
be visually inspected whenever the brake pads are to carefully follow wheel removal and installation
replaced. Rotors also need to be weighed before brake instructions.
pads are replaced to confirm that the rotor mass is
greater than the wear-out mass printed on the rotor.
The rotor can be reused if the weight of the rotor
is above the mass limit. Rotor inspection and weighing
methods can be found in the service manual. See
Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-16.
Brake Rotor Protector

{ CAUTION:
Ceramic rotors will be very hot after operation and
touching them may cause burns. Be sure brake
system is completely cool prior to installation of
protector, or coming in contact with them.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-47
 Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not return
to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign that brake service might be
required.

Brake Adjustment
Every brake stop, the disc brakes automatically adjust
for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
A rotor protector should always be installed before any was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
wheel removal. The protector can be installed by feeding When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
it through the wheel spokes and slipping it over the outer example, when the brake linings wear down and new
edge of the rotor. Leave the protector in place, over the ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
rotor edge, until the wheel is re-installed. Rotor protectors replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
are available through your dealer/retailer. not work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change in
many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts
are installed.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-48
Battery Vehicle Storage
This vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for one
that has the replacement number shown on the original { CAUTION:
battery’s label.
For battery replacement, see your dealer/retailer or the Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that
service manual. To purchase a service manual, see can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not
Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-16. careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-50 for tips
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related on working around a battery without getting hurt.
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,
handling. remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This helps keep the battery from running down.
See “Power Window Initialization” in Power Windows on
page 2-17.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or
use a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain the
charge of the battery over an extended period of time.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-49
Jump Starting Notice: If you try to start your vehicle by pushing
or pulling it, you could damage your vehicle. Do not
If your battery has run down, you may want to use push or pull your vehicle to start it; instead, use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your the jump starting procedure in this manual to start
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely. your vehicle when the battery has run down.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
{ CAUTION: Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
because: with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
• They contain acid that can burn you. 2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite. can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
• They contain enough electricity to burn you. each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
all of these things can hurt you. could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in Neutral before setting the parking brakes.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-50
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed.
This will avoid sparks and help save both
batteries. And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations on each vehicle.

6.2 L LS3 shown, 7.0 L LS7 and 6.2 L LS9 similar.

Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) terminal (A)

and a remote negative (−) terminal (B), as shown
in the illustration, which should be used to jump start
your vehicle.
The remote positive (+) terminal (A) can be
accessed by opening the cover of the engine
compartment fuse block.
The remote negative (−) terminal (B) is located
underneath the engine cover, below the engine
oil fill cap.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-51
 See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14
for the location of the engine compartment fuse
block and engine oil fill cap. { CAUTION:
You will not need to access the battery for jump
starting. The remote terminals are for that purpose. Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
{ CAUTION: you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
An electric fan can start up even when the engine need to add water to the battery installed in your
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
clothing and tools away from any underhood sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
electric fan. add water to take care of that first. If you do not,
explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-52
 7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
{ CAUTION: remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
once the engine is running. Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
dead battery.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to 9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy, but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote connection is just as good there, and the chance
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) terminal
will get a short that would damage the battery for this purpose.
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the 10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on the engine for a while.
the dead battery because this can cause sparks. 11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote service.
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-53
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may the following:
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would 1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always vehicle that had the dead battery.
connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch 2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
each other or other metal. vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the engine fuse block cover to its original
position.
6. You may also need to initialize the power windows.
See “Power Window Initialize” under Power
Windows on page 2-17 for more information.

Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
Jumper Cable Removal It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Negative (−) Terminal Have it inspected and repaired.
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-54
How to Check Lubricant What to Use
To add lubricant when the level is low, use Dexron LS
Gear Oil 75W-90 (GM Part No. US. 88862624, in
Canada 88862625) meeting GM Specification 9986290.
To completely refill after draining, see Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12. Then fill to the
bottom of the filler plug hole with the Synthetic Gear
Lubricant.

Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
level surface. (for vertical aim).
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
will need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to recommended that you take the vehicle to your
raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. dealer/retailer for service.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-55
Bulb Replacement The vehicle may have HID headlamps. After an HID
headlamp bulb has been replaced, you may notice
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see that the beam is a slightly different shade than it was
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-59. originally. This is normal.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer. Halogen Bulbs

High Intensity Discharge (HID)

Lighting { CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
{ CAUTION: others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions on the bulb package.
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you try to
service any of the system components, you could
be seriously injured. Have your dealer/retailer or a
qualified technician service them.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-56
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and To replace a high-beam or front parking/turn signal/
DRL bulb:
Parking Lamps 1. Turn the wheel to allow access to the wheel well.

A. High-beam Headlamp
B. Low-beam Headlamp
C. Front Parking/Turn Signal/Daytime Running
Lamp (DRL)
If the low-beam headlamp needs to be replaced, see
your dealer/retailer. See High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting on page 5-56 for more information.

2. Remove the three outer fasteners to move the

access panel back.
3. Remove the outer cover to expose the high-beam
headlamp bulb socket.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-57
 4. Remove the headlamp Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
bulb by releasing the
outer tabs from Stoplamps
the socket.
To replace a stoplamp, taillamp/turn signal bulb:
1. Remove the screw from the top of the lamp
assembly.

5. Remove the front parking/turn signal bulb by turning

the bulb socket counterclockwise.
6. Replace the high-beam headlamp bulb with a new
bulb and reattach to the bulb socket.
Replace the front parking/turn signal bulb by turning
the bulb socket clockwise.
7. Reverse the Steps 2 through 4 to reinstall.

2. Tilt the lamp assembly toward you.

3. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter turn
counterclockwise and pull it out.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-58
 4. Pull the bulb straight out to remove it from the
socket.
Windshield Replacement
5. Push the new bulb in the bulb socket until it snaps The windshield is part of the Head-Up Display (HUD)
into place. system. If you ever have to get the windshield replaced,
get one that is designed for HUD or the HUD image
6. Reinstall the lamp assembly by first lining up the may look out of focus.
tabs on the bottom of the lamp assembly with the
tabs in the vehicle, then slide it in.
7. Replace the screw at the top of the lamp assembly.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Replacement Bulbs Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
Exterior Lamp Bulb Number for more information.
Front Parking/Turn Replacement blades come in different types and are
Signal/Daytime Running 5702KA removed in different ways. For the proper type and
Lamp (DRL) length, see Maintenance Replacement Parts on
Headlamp, High-Beam Lamp H9 page 6-14.
Sidemarker Lamp W3W It is a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade
Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn assembly every six months. Allowing the wiper blade arm
Signal Lamp 3057KX to touch the windshield when no wiper blade is installed
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your could damage the windshield. Any damage that occurs
dealer/retailer. would not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty. Do not
allow the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-59
To remove the wiper blade assembly: 4. Remove the insert from the blade assembly (A).
1. Open the hood to gain access to the windshield The insert has two notches at one end that are
wipers. locked by the bottom claws of the blade assembly.
At the notch end, pull the insert from the blade
2. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
assembly.
To install the new wiper insert:

1. Slide the insert (D), notched end last, into the end
A. Blade Assembly D. Blade Pivot with the two blade claws (A). Slide the insert all the
B. Arm Assembly E. Hook Slot way through the blade claws at the opposite end (B).
C. Locking Tab F. Arm Hook The plastic caps (C) will be forced off as the insert is
3. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking fully installed.
tab (C). Pull down on the blade assembly (A) to
release it from the wiper arm hook (F).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-60
2. Be sure the notches are locked by the bottom Installation guide:
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the insert slots.
3. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm
hook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in
the hook slot.
4. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
onto the windshield.

A. Claw in Notch
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-61
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever • Underinflated tires pose the same danger
have questions about your tire warranty and where as overloaded tires. The resulting
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty booklet accident could cause serious injury.
for details. For additional information refer to the tire Check all tires frequently to maintain the
manufacturer. recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your tires are
cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
{ CAUTION: page 5-71.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
• Poorly maintained and improperly used cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
tires are dangerous. impact — such as when you hit a
• Overloading your tires can cause pothole. Keep tires at the recommended
overheating as a result of too much pressure.
flexing. You could have an air-out and a • Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
serious accident. See Loading the If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
Vehicle on page 4-23. have been damaged, replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued) See High-Speed Operation on page 5-72 for
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
driving.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-62
Low-Profile Performance Tire Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased
traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter
The original equipment tires on your vehicle are tires, there may be decreased dry road traction,
classified as low-profile performance tires. These increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After
tires are designed for very responsive driving on switching to winter tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
wet or dry pavement. You may also notice more handling and braking.
road noise with low-profile tires and that they tend
See your dealer/retailer for details regarding winter tire
to wear faster.
availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying
Notice: If the vehicle has low-profile tires, they New Tires on page 5-78.
are more susceptible to damage from road If you choose to use winter tires:
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage can • Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all
occur when coming into contact with road four wheel positions.
hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged objects, • Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load
or when sliding into a curb. The vehicle range, and speed rating as the original equipment
warranty does not cover this type of damage. tires.
Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure
and, when possible avoid contact with curbs, Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
potholes, and other road hazards. equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
Winter Tires speed capability.
If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads
often, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall performance on
most surfaces but they may not offer the traction you
would like or the same level of performance as winter
tires on snow or ice covered roads.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-63
Tire Sidewall Labeling (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
Useful information about a tire is molded into its to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
sidewall. The example below shows a typical a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
passenger (p-metric) tire sidewall. GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number
of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of tires based on three performance factors:
letters and numbers used to define a particular treadwear, traction and temperature resistance.
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, For more information see Uniform Tire Quality
and service description. See the “Tire Size” Grading on page 5-80.
illustration later in this section for more detail.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-64
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: (C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
Maximum load that can be carried and the indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
maximum pressure needed to support that load. For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
Tire Size that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as
The following illustration shows an example of a it is wide.
typical passenger (p-metric) vehicle tire size. (D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States tire. The load index represents the load carry
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed rating
as the first character in the tire size means a is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set a load.
by the U. S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-65
Tire Terminology and Definitions Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per page 5-71.
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa). Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
Accessory Weight: This means the combined standard and optional equipment including the
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
optional accessories are, automatic transmission, without passengers and cargo.
power steering, power brakes, power windows, DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
power seats, and air conditioning. of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
to its width. motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located alphanumeric designator which can also identify the
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and date
made from steel or other reinforcing materials. of production.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-23.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-23.
to the centerline of the tread.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-66
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-23. occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an page 4-23.
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle. Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
vehicles. The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
Load Index: An assigned number ranging bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load brand, and/or model name molding that is higher
carrying capacity of a tire. or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
sidewall. multipurpose vehicles.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
for that tire. pressure as shown on the tire placard.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-71
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of and Loading the Vehicle on page 4-23.
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-67
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid Standards): A tire information system that
at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which are determined by tire manufacturers using
the tire beads are seated. government testing procedures. The ratings are
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
and the bead. Tire Quality Grading on page 5-80.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
tire can operate. (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
the Vehicle on page 4-23.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided. Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
contact with the road.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
called wear bars, that show across the tread of and the original equipment tire size and
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on Loading Information Label” under Loading
page 5-77. the Vehicle on page 4-23.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-68
Run-Flat Tires If a tire goes flat, you will not need to stop on the side
of the road to change the tire. You can just keep on
This vehicle, when new, had run-flat tires. There is no driving. The shorter the distance you drive and the
spare tire, no tire changing equipment, and no place slower the speed, the greater the chance that the tire
to store a tire in the vehicle. Run-flat tires perform will not have to be replaced. If you drive on a deflated
so well without any air that a Tire Pressure Monitor run-flat tire for 25 miles (40 km) or less and at speeds of
System (TPMS) is used to alert you if a tire has 55 mph (90 km/h) or less, there is a good chance that
lost pressure. the tire can be repaired. The tires on coupe, convertible
and Z06 models can operate effectively with no air
pressure for up to 100 miles (160 km) at speeds up to
{ CAUTION: 55 mph (90 km/h), but the tire would then have to
be replaced. The tires on ZR1 models can operate
effectively with no air pressure for up to 50 miles (80 km)
When the low tire warning light is displayed on at speeds up to 55 mph (90 km/h), but the tire would
the instrument panel cluster, your vehicle’s then have to be replaced. When a tire is filled with air, it
handling capabilities will be reduced during severe provides a cushion between the road and the wheel.
maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you could lose Because you will not have this cushion when driving on
control of your vehicle. You or others could be a deflated tire, try to avoid potholes that could damage
injured. Do not drive over 55 mph (90 km/h) your wheel and require replacement of it.
when the low tire warning light is displayed.
Drive cautiously and check your tire pressures
as soon as you can.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-69
Some road hazards can damage a tire beyond repair.
This damage could occur even before you have driven on CAUTION: (Continued)
the tire in a deflated condition. When a tire has been
damaged, or if you have driven any distance on a run-flat
attempt to repair, replace, dismount, or mount a
tire, check with an authorized run-flat tire service center
to determine whether the tire can be repaired or should run-flat tire. Let only an authorized run-flat service
be replaced. To maintain your vehicle’s run-flat feature, center repair, replace, dismount, and mount
all replacement tires must be self-supporting tires. As run-flat tires.
soon as possible, contact the nearest authorized GM or
run-flat servicing facility for inspection and repair or
replacement. To locate the nearest GM or run-flat The valve stems on your run-flat tires have sensors that
servicing facility, call Roadside Assistance. For phone are part of the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
numbers and Roadside Service details see Roadside See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-73. These
Assistance Program on page 7-7. sensors contain batteries which are designed to last
for 10 years under normal driving conditions. See your
dealer/retailer if you ever need to have a wheel
replaced, or if the sensors ever need replacement.
{ CAUTION:
Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage the tire
valves and tire pressure monitor sensors in the
Run-flat tires are constructed differently than other vehicle’s run-flat tires. This damage would not be
tires and could explode during improper service. covered by warranty. Do not use liquid sealants
You or others could be injured or killed if you in the vehicle’s run-flat tires.
CAUTION: (Continued)

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-70
Inflation - Tire Pressure A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
operate effectively. correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. amount of air pressure needed to support
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
For additional information regarding how much
• Too much flexing weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
• Too much heat of the Tire and Loading Information label,
• Tire overloading see Loading the Vehicle on page 4-23. How you
load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and
• Premature or irregular wear ride comfort. Never load your vehicle with more
• Poor handling weight than it was designed to carry.
• Reduced fuel economy When to Check
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), Check your tires once a month or more.
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-71
How to Check High-Speed Operation
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires { CAUTION:
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no higher, puts an additional strain on tires. Sustained
more than 1 mile (1.6 km). high-speed driving causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure. You could have
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. a crash and you or others could be killed. Some
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended adjustment for high speed operation. When speed
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the can be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the are rated for high speed operation, in excellent
recommended amount. condition, and set to the correct cold tire inflation
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on pressure for the vehicle load.
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-72
If you will be driving your vehicle at speeds of 175 mph Tire Pressure Monitor System
(282 km/h) or higher, where it is legal, set the cold
inflation pressure to the maximum inflation pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
shown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (265 kPa), whichever and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
is lower. See the example following. When you end this The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
high-speed driving, return the tires to the cold inflation vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information receiver located in the vehicle.
label. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-23.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
Example: checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press. on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure for those tires.)
high-speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
Racing or other competitive driving may affect the equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
warranty coverage of your vehicle. See your warranty that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
booklet for more information. or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-73
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper Federal Communications Commission
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has (FCC) and Industry and Science
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS Canada
low tire pressure telltale.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction conditions:
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale 1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
will flash for approximately one minute and then 2. This device must accept any interference received,
remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will including interference that may cause undesired
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long operation.
as the malfunction exists.
Vehicles with TPMS operate on a radio frequency and
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system comply with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of 1. This device may not cause interference.
reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the 2. This device must accept any interference received,
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS including interference that may cause undesired
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or operation of the device.
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or Changes or modifications to this system by other than
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to an authorized service facility could void authorization to
function properly. use this equipment.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-75 for
additional information.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-74
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly on your A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to
vehicle. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
the vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure readings equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
to a receiver located in the vehicle. your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 4-23, for an example of the Tire and
When a low tire pressure
Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle.
condition is detected, the
Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-71 for
TPMS illuminates the low
additional information.
tire pressure warning light,
located in the instrument Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
panel cluster. pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-77, When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-77,
and Tires on page 5-62.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in
a specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and the Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
DIC warning message appear at each ignition cycle until damage caused by using a tire sealant is not covered
the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure. by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire sealants.
Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by the
driver. For additional information and details about the
DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and
Displays on page 3-50 and DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-56.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-75
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message The DIC message and TPMS malfunction light
should go off once the TPMS sensors are installed
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the and the sensor matching process is performed
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the successfully.
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the • Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC and wheels other than those recommended for your
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can properly. See Buying New Tires on page 5-78.
cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come • Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
on are: using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
• The TPMS sensor matching process was not done or could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
not completed successfully. The DIC message If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or
should go off after successfully completing the signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
sensor matching process. service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or comes on and stays on.
damaged. Under these conditions the TPMS
malfunction light (low tire warning light) comes on,
and at the same time the DIC message is displayed.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-76
TPMS Sensor Matching Process When It Is Time for New Tires
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,
or rotate your vehicle’s tires, the identification codes influence when you need new tires.
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions One way to tell when it is
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger time for new tires is to
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver check the treadwear
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your indicators, which will
dealer/retailer for service. appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
Tire Inspection and Rotation (1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires for signs of wear or damage Also
check for damaged wheels. See When It Is Time for
New Tires on page 5-77 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-82.
The tires on your vehicle are different sizes front
to rear. Due to this, the tires should not be rotated.
Each tire and wheel should be used only in the
position it is in.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-77
You need a new tire if any of the following statements Buying New Tires
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
around the tire. vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on your
vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet General
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC
tire’s rubber. Spec) system rating. If you need replacement tires,
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the
same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle will
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
continue to have tires that are designed to give the
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split. same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that use, as the original tires.
cannot be repaired well because of the size or GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
location of the damage. dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if your
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast this
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire
aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
Spec number will be followed by an MS for mud and
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5-64, for
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure about
additional information.
the need to replace your tires as they get older, consult
the tire manufacturer for more information.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-78
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help
keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the { CAUTION:
tires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling performance of your If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
vehicle. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-77. wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
original equipment tires may not be available for H, V, could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
W, Y and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose snow radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.
tires with a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s
maximum speed capability.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
{ CAUTION: construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as
your vehicle’s original tires.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes (other could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if
than those originally installed on your vehicle), non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on it. Non-TPC
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning that is
vehicle may not handle properly, and you could higher or lower than the proper warning level you would
have a crash. Using tires of different sizes (other get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 5-73.
than those originally installed on your vehicle),
brands or types, may also cause damage to your Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
vehicle. Be sure to use the correct size, brand, Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading the
and type tires on all four wheels. Vehicle on page 4-23, for more information about
the Tire and Loading Information label and its location
on your vehicle.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-79
Different Size Tires and Wheels Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than Quality grades can be found where applicable on
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its maximum section width. For example:
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability,
and resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle Treadwear 200 Traction AA
has electronic systems such as, antilock brakes, traction Temperature A
control, and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected. The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
{ CAUTION: grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
not provide an acceptable level of performance and tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
safety if tires not recommended for those wheels system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
are selected. You may increase the chance that you snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM
limited-production tires.
certified technician. While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform to
See Buying New Tires on page 5-78 and Accessories federal safety requirements and additional General
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information. Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-80
Treadwear Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
controlled conditions on a specified government generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would when tested under controlled conditions on a
wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
government course as a tire graded 100. The high temperature can cause the material of the tire
relative performance of tires depends upon the to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
actual conditions of their use, however, and may temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
depart significantly from the norm due to variations grade C corresponds to a level of performance
in driving habits, service practices, and differences which all passenger car tires must meet under the
in road characteristics and climate. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
Traction – AA, A, B, C performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, minimum required by law. It should be noted that
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s the temperature grade for this tire is established for
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
controlled conditions on specified government test Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C loading, either separately or in combination, can
may have poor traction performance. cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-81
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest the same way as the one it replaces.
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your have the right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires for your vehicle.
and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
{ CAUTION:
Wheel Replacement
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the It could affect the braking and handling of your
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your lose control. You could have a collision in which
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist. you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-82
 { CAUTION: { CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous. Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
You cannot know how it has been used or how which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
far it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and become loose after a time. The wheel could
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, come off and cause a crash. When you
use a new GM original equipment wheel. change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
vehicle ground clearance, and tire clearance to
the body and chassis.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-83
Tightening Wheel Lug Nuts Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
{ CAUTION: torque specification.

Never use oil or grease on studs or the threads of Tighten the wheel lug nuts
the wheel nuts. If you do, the wheel nuts might firmly in a crisscross
come loose and the wheel could fall off, causing sequence as shown.
a crash.

{ CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel
nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and
even come off. This could lead to a crash. Be sure
to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-84
Tire Chains
CAUTION: (Continued)

{ CAUTION: traction device only if its manufacturer

recommends it for use on the vehicle and tire size
combination and road conditions. Follow that
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid damage
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without to the vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust or remove
the proper amount of clearance can cause damage the device if it is contacting the vehicle, and do not
to the brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. spin the wheels. If you do find traction devices that
The area damaged by the tire chains could cause will fit, install them on the rear tires.
you to lose control of the vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash. Use another type of
CAUTION: (Continued)

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-85
Lifting the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION: Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
Lifting a vehicle can cause an injury. The vehicle could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
can slip off the jack and roll over you or other vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
people. You and they could be badly injured. Find
a level place to lift your vehicle. To help prevent
the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly. { CAUTION:
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual transmission Raising the vehicle with the jack improperly
to 1 (First) or R (Reverse). positioned can damage the vehicle or the vehicle
3. Turn off the engine. may fall and cause your or others injury.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move,
you can put blocks in front of and behind the
wheels.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-86
If you ever use a jack to lift your vehicle, follow the Lifting From the Front
instructions that came with the jack, and be sure to use
the correct lifting points to avoid damaging your vehicle.
Notice: Lifting your vehicle improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by your warranty. To lift your vehicle properly, follow
the advice in this part.
To help prevent vehicle damage:
• Be sure to place a block or pad between the
jack and the vehicle.
• Make sure the jack you are using spans at least
two crossmember ribs.
• Lift only in the areas shown in the following The front lifting points can be accessed from either side
pictures. of your vehicle, behind the front tires.
For additional information, see your dealer/retailer
and the Chevrolet Corvette service manual.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-87
 1. Locate the front lifting points (A), according to the 3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
illustration shown. spans at least two of the crossmember ribs (B).
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack
and the vehicle.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-88
Lifting From the Rear

The rear lifting points can be accessed from the rear of

the vehicle, on either the driver’s or passenger’s side.

1. Locate the rear lifting points (A), according to the

illustration shown.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack
and the vehicle.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-89
 If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blow out while you are driving,
especially if you maintain the tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly.
See Tires on page 5-62 for additional information. But if
you should ever have a blowout, here are a few tips about
what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
spans at least two of the crossmember ribs (B). brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
For more information, see Doing Your Own Service The vehicle has no spare tire, no tire changing
Work on page 5-4. equipment, and no place to store a tire.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-90
The vehicle, when new, had run-flat tires. This type of tire
can operate effectively with no air pressure, so you will
Appearance Care
not need to stop on the side of the road to change a flat
tire. You can just keep on driving. The shorter the Interior Cleaning
distance you drive and the slower the speed, the greater
the chance that the run-flat tire will not have to be The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
replaced. Run-flat tires perform so well without any air cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
that a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is used to can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
alert you if a tire has lost pressure. See Run-Flat Tires carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
on page 5-69 and Tire Pressure Monitor System on vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the
page 5-73. upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from
becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be
removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior
{ CAUTION: may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains
to set rapidly.

Special tools and procedures are required to Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
service a run-flat tire. If these special tools and
that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer
procedures are not used you or others could be color to the vehicle’s interior.
injured and the vehicle could be damaged. Always
be sure the proper tools and procedures, as
described in the service manual, are used.

To order a service manual, see Service Publications

Ordering Information on page 7-16.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-91
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned. upholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can be
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on obtained from your dealer/retailer.
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass Do not clean the vehicle using:
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, • A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth. from any interior surface.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning • A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch interior surfaces.
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window • Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle, cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner. the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become of soil removal.
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before • Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior, attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
doors and windows. Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs • Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
using a small brush with soft bristles.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle’s interior.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-92
Fabric/Carpet 3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister 4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used cleaning cloth remains clean.
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil,
always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda. 5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
possible using one of the following techniques: that was used with plain water.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
until no more can be removed. upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a small
hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally cleaned
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and area gives any impression that a ring formation may
then vacuum. result, clean the entire surface.
To clean: After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
club soda. fabric or carpet.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-93
Coated Moldings Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
These moldings are around the hatch opening in the Plastic Surfaces
rear area.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove
• When lightly soiled, wipe with a sponge or soft dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean
lint-free cloth dampened with water. soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
• When heavily soiled, use warm soapy water. used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters
or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
Leather protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of the interior and are not
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, products, or those containing organic solvents to
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be clean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot manner.
lifters or spot removers on leather. Many commercial
leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
and protect leather may permanently change the instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
appearance and feel of the leather and are not annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based difficult to see through the windshield under certain
products, or those containing organic solvents to conditions.
clean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform Cargo Cover and Convenience Net
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
Wash with warm water and mild detergent, rinse
with cold water and tumble dry on low. Do not use
chlorine bleach.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-94
Care of Safety Belts Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry. The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
{ CAUTION: damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts not be covered by the warranty.
only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on your
Weatherstrips vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, vehicle care product.
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-95
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to Finish Care
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain. Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton hand may be necessary to remove residue from
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting. the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Notice: If you drive the vehicle through an If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
automatic car wash that does not have enough clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
clearance for the wide rear tires and wheels, you basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
could damage the vehicle. Verify with the manager non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
of the car wash that the vehicle will fit before finish.
entering the car wash or use a touchless car wash.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
result in damage or removal of paint and decals. finish on the vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-95. necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-96
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Windshield and Wiper Blades
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary. towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts. worn or damaged.
ZR1 Carbon Fiber Panels Wipers can be damaged by:
Carbon fiber panels can be washed and waxed like any • Extreme dusty conditions
other panels.
• Sand and salt
Use a clear or black pigmented wax on the inner hood
carbon fiber panel. • Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
ZR1 Hood Window
The hood window on the ZR1 can be cleaned in the
same manner as the headlamp lenses. See Cleaning
Exterior Lamps/Lenses on page 5-96 for more
information.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-97
Removable Roof Panel Convertible Top
Notice: If you use a glass treatment and/or The vehicle’s convertible top should be cleaned often.
conditioner that contains ethyl alcohol or ethyl However, high pressure car washes may cause water to
sulfate on the roof panel, you could damage enter your vehicle.
the panel. The repairs would not be covered When you hand wash the top, do it in partial shade.
by your warranty. Only use a GM-approved glass Use a mild soap, lukewarm water and a soft sponge.
cleaner on the roof panel. A chamois or cloth may leave lint on the top, and
Special care is necessary when cleaning, removing, a brush can chafe the threads in the top fabric. Do not
and/or storing the roof panel. use detergents, harsh cleaners, solvents or bleaching
agents.
• Flush with water to remove dust and dirt, then dry
the panel. Wet the entire vehicle and wash the top evenly to avoid
spots or rings. Let the soap remain on the fabric for
• Clean a transparent roof panel with GM Glass a few minutes. When the top is really dirty, use a mild
Cleaner. Leave the cleaner on the panel for foam-type cleaner. Thoroughly rinse the entire vehicle,
one minute, then wipe the panel with a soft, lint-free then let the top dry in direct sunlight.
cloth. Do not use glass cleaner on a painted roof
panel. To protect the convertible top:
• Do not use abrasive cleaning materials on either type • After you wash the vehicle, make sure the top is
of panel. completely dry before you lower it.
If water drops are frequently allowed to dry on the roof • Do not get any cleaner on the vehicle’s painted
panel, impurities in the water will adhere to the top. finish; it could leave streaks.
These impurities may etch or mar the finish. When the • If you decide to go through an automatic car wash,
panel gets wet, dry it off. ask the manager if the equipment could damage
your top.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-98
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
and Trim chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners
with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because
The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-plated they could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish
wheels. on aluminum wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome
be applied.
polish on chrome wheels only.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium, immediately after application.
calcium or sodium chloride. These chlorides are
used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust. Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic car
Always wash the vehicle’s chrome with soap and wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes,
water after exposure. could damage the aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels. The repairs would not be covered by the
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive vehicle warranty. Never drive a vehicle that has
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through an
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs cleaning brushes.
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-99
Tires Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner. Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces protection.
on the vehicle.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
Finish Damage and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system can
quickly and may develop into major repair expense. do this.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up

materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger areas Fiberglass Springs
of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s/ (Composite Springs)
retailer’s body and paint shop.
Notice: If you use acidic or corrosive cleaning
products, engine degreasers or aluminum cleaning
agents on fiberglass springs, you may damage the
springs. The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only approved cleaners when cleaning
your vehicle’s fiberglass springs.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-100
Chemical Paint Spotting Vehicle Identification
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new
vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
This is the legal identifier for the vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel,
on the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield
from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on the
Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and
the certificates of title and registration.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-101
Engine Identification Electrical System
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code helps identify the vehicle’s engine, Add-On Electrical Equipment
specifications, and replacement parts. See “Engine
Specifications” under Capacities and Specifications Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the
on page 5-110 for the vehicle’s engine code. vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
Service Parts Identification Label the vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electrical
This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is equipment can keep other components from
very helpful if parts need to be ordered. The label has working as they should.
the following information: Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) the vehicle is not operating.
• Model designation The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
• Paint information
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-56.
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle. Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the fuse
block. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to turn
off. If this happens, have the headlamp wiring checked
right away.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-102
Windshield Wiper Fuses If you ever have a problem on the road and do not
have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit same amperage. Just pick some feature of the vehicle
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy that you can get along without – like the radio or cigarette
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
overload is caused by some electrical problem, have it Replace it as soon as you can.
fixed. Vehicles with the ZR–1 package have an intercooler
relay located on the fan shroud. See your dealer/retailer.
Power Windows and Other Power Vehicles with the ZR–1 package also have a fuel
Options system mini-fuse. It is located near the battery in the
battery storage compartment in the rear of the vehicle.
Circuit breakers protect the power seats, power windows,
and other power accessories. When the current load
is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or The instrument panel fuse block is located on the
goes away. passenger side of the vehicle, under the instrument
panel and under the toe-board.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers Remove the carpet and toe-board covering to access
the fuse block by pulling at the top of each corner of the
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from panel. Open the fuse block cover to access the fuses.
short circuits by a combination of J-Case fuses,
mini-fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces You can remove fuses using the fuse puller.
the chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-103
 Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
BCK/UP LAMP Reverse Lamps BTSI SOL/STR Brake Transmission Shift Interlock,
BLANK Not Used WHL LCK Steering Wheel Column Lock
BLANK Not Used CLSTR/HUD Cluster, Heads-Up Display

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-104
 Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
CRUISE Cruise Control Switch REVERSE Reverse Lamps
SWITCH LAMPS
CTSY/LAMP Courtesy Lamp RUN CRNK Run/Crank Relay
DR LCK Door Locks SDM/AOS Sensing and Diagnostic Module,
DRIV DR SWTCH Automatic Occupant Sensing
Driver Door Switch AIRBAG Module, Airbag
SWITCH
ECM Engine Control Module (ECM) SPARE Spare
Exhaust Module (Z06), SPARE Spare
EXH MDL Spare (Coupe and Convertible) SPARE Spare
GM LAN SPARE Spare
GM LAN Devices
RUN/CRNK STOP LAMP Stop Lamp
HTD SEAT/ SWC DM Steering Wheel Dimming
WPR RLY Heated Seat, Wiper Relays
TELE Telescope Switch, Memory Seat
HVAC/ Heating. Ventilation/Air Conditioning, SWTCH/MSM Module
PWR SND Power Sounder
TONNEAU
IGN SWTCH/ RELSE Tonneau Release
Ignition Switch, Intrusion Sensor
INTR SNSR
TPA Tonneau Pulldown Actuator
Electric Inside Rearview Mirror,
ISRVM/HVAC Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning
ONSTAR OnStar® Fuses Usage
RDO/S-BAND/ BLANK Blank
VICS Radio, S-Band, VICS
BLANK Blank
REAR FOG/ Rear Fog Lamp, Assembly Line FUEL DR
ALDL/TOP Diagnostic Link Connector, RELSE Fuel Door Release
SWTCH Convertible Top Switch

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-105
 Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
REAR/FOG Rear Fog Lamps PWR SEATS Power Seats, Memory Seat Module
TONNEAU MSM
Tonneau Release
RELSE PWR/ WNDWS/ Power Windows, Trunk, Fuel Door
TRUNK RELSE Trunk Release TRUNK/FUEL
RELSE Release
TRUNK RELSE Trunk Release
Fuses Usage
WPR DWELL Wiper Dwell
AUX PWR Auxiliary Power
WPR/WSW Windshield Wiper/Washer
BLANK Not Used
BLANK Not Used
BLANK Not Used Engine Compartment Fuse Block
BLANK Not Used There is one fuse block in the engine compartment
BLANK Not Used located on the passenger side of the vehicle. See
BLANK Not Used Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for more
BLANK Not Used information on location.
DRVR HTD Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
SEAT Driver Heated Seat
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
LTR Cigarette Lighter covers on any electrical component.
PASS HTD Passenger Heated Seat
SEAT

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-106
Fuse Usage Fuse Usage
1 Transmission Control 4 Wiper
Module/Transmission 5 Stoplamps/Back-Up Lamps
2 Horn, Alternator Sense 6 Oxygen Sensor
3 Antilock Braking System (ABS)/Real 7 Battery Main 5
Time Damping
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-107
 Fuse Usage Fuse Usage
8 Parking Lamps 23 Passenger Side High-Beam
Powertrain Relay Input/Electronic Headlamp
9
Throttle Control 24 Driver Side High-Beam Headlamp
10 Manual Transmission Solenoids Engine Control Module (ECM)/
11 Antilock Braking System 56 Transmission Control Module (TCM)/
Easy Key Module
12 Odd Numbered Fuel Injectors
13 Electronic Suspension Control
(Option) J-Style Fuses Usage
Canister Purge Solenoid, Mass Air 25 Cooling Fan
14 Flow Sensor 26 Battery Main 3
15 Air Conditioner Compressor 27 Antilock Brake System
16 Even Numbered Fuel Injectors Heating/Ventilation/Air Conditioning
28
17 Windshield Washer Blower
18 Headlamp Washer 29 Battery Main 2
Passenger Side Low-Beam 30 Starter
19 Headlamp 31 Audio Amplifier
20 Fuel Pump 32 Intercooler Pump
21 Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp 33 Battery Main 1
22 Front Fog Lamp

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-108
Micro-Relays Usage Spare Fuses Usage
34 Horn 48 Spare
35 Air Conditioning Compressor 49 Spare
36 Windshield Washer 50 Spare
37 Parking Lamps, Foglamps 51 Spare
38 Front Fog Lamp 52 Spare
39 High-Beam Headlamp 53 Spare
46 Headlamp Washer 54 Fuse Puller
55 Fuel Pump
Diodes Usage
Mini-Relays Usage § Diode 1
40 Rear Defog § Wiper
41 Windshield Wiper High/Low
42 Windshield Wiper Run/Accessory
§ Diode 2

43 Crank
44 Powertrain Ignition 1
45 Windshield Wiper On/Off
47 Low-Beam Headlamp

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-109
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.

Capacities
Application
English Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Cooling System
6.2L LS3 V8 Engine 11.9 qt 11.3 L
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine – Cooling System 12.7 qt 12.0 L
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine – Supercharger
5.2 qt 4.9 L
Intercooler Cooling System
7.0L LS7 V8 Engine 11.9 qt 11.3 L

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-110
 Capacities
Application
English Metric
Engine Oil with Filter
6.2L LS3 V8 6.0 qt 5.7 L
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine 10.5 qt 9.9 L
7.0L LS7 V8 Engine 10.5 qt 9.9 L
Fuel Tank 18.0 gal 68.0 L
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission (Pan Removal and Filter
Replacement) 6.5 qt 6.2 L

Manual Transmission – Base 3.6 qt 3.5 L

Manual Transmission – Z51 4.2 qt 4.0 L
Manual Transmission – Z06 4.5 qt 4.3 L
Manual Transmission – ZR1 4.5 qt 4.3 L
Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-111
 Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap Firing Order
Automatic
6.2L LS3 V8 W 0.040 in (1.016 mm) 1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3
Manual
6.2L LS9 V8 R Manual 0.040 in (1.016 mm) 1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3
7.0L LS7 V8 E Manual 0.040 in (1.016 mm) 1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3

Engine Data
Engine Horsepower Torque Displacement Compression Ratio
6.2L LS3 V8 without
430 @ 5900 rpm 424 lb ft @ 4600 rpm 6.2L 10.69:1
option NPP
6.2L LS3 V8 with
436 @ 5900 rpm 428 lb ft @ 4600 rpm 6.2L 10.69:1
option NPP
6.2L LS9 V8
638 @ 6500 rpm 604 lb ft @ 3800 rpm 6.2L 9.10:1
Supercharged
7.0L LS7 V8 505 @ 6300 rpm 470 lb ft @ 4800 rpm 7.0L 11.00:1

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-112
 Section 6 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2 Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9
Introduction ...................................................6-2 At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2 At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2 At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-2 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4 Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................6-14
Additional Required Services ............................6-6 Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-15
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7 Maintenance Record .....................................6-16

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-1
Maintenance Schedule Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
Introduction the vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
change as recommended. affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from the vehicle. To help protect the
environment, and to keep the vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain the vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance Schedule

We want to help keep this vehicle in good working
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive
supplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warranty it. You might drive very short distances only a few times a
and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer for week. Or you might drive long distances all the time in
details. very hot, dusty weather. You might use the vehicle in
making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work, to do
errands, or in many other ways.
Maintenance Requirements
Because of all the different ways people use their
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary following and note how you drive. If you have any
to keep this vehicle in good working condition. Any questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition,
damage caused by failure to follow scheduled see your dealer/retailer.
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-2
This schedule is for vehicles that: Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended you are technically qualified and have the necessary
equipment, have your dealer/retailer do these jobs.
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-23. When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal work using genuine parts.
driving limits.
To purchase service information, see Service
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane Publications Ordering Information on page 7-16.
on page 5-5.
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells what
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 should be checked, when to check it, and what can easily
should be performed when indicated. See Additional be done to help keep the vehicle in good condition.
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information. The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 and Maintenance Replacement Parts
{ CAUTION: on page 6-14. When the vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be parts from your dealer/retailer.
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have
any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 5-4.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-3
Scheduled Maintenance When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message displays, Required services are described in the following for
service is required for the vehicle. Have the vehicle “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles it is recommended that the first service be
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under the best Maintenance I, the second service be Maintenance II,
conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate that and then alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
vehicle service is necessary for over a year. However, the thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II may
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year be required more often.
and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/ Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the message
retailer has trained service technicians who will perform displays within 10 months since the vehicle was
this work using genuine parts and reset the system. purchased or Maintenance II was performed.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally, Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km) service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
since the last service. Remember to reset the oil life Maintenance II whenever the message displays
system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life 10 months or more since the last service or if the
System on page 5-26 for information on the Engine message has not come on at all for one year.
Oil Life System and resetting the system.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-4
 Scheduled Maintenance
Service Maintenance I Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-19. Reset oil life
system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-26. An Emission Control • •
Service.
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g). • •
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
•
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-28. See footnote (k).
Check tire inflation pressures and tire wear. See Tires on page 5-62. • •
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
• •
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
• •
in this section.
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (j). •

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(40 000) (80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
• • • • • •
damaged components.
Except ZR1: Replace engine air cleaner
filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on • • •
page 5-28.
ZR1 Only: Replace engine air cleaner
filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on • • • • • •
page 5-28.
Change automatic transmission fluid and
• • •
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid and
•
filter (normal service).
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
•
plug wires. An Emission Control Service.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-6
 Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(40 000) (80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
•
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
ZR1 Only: Intercooler system service
(or every five years, whichever occurs •
first). See footnote (n).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. •
See footnote (l).
Change clutch hydraulic fluid at a regular
maintenance service every two years.
See footnote (m).

Maintenance Footnotes (b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. For ZO6 and ZR1 models and vehicles with the Z51
Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, parking performance package, lubricate the outer ends of both
brake, etc. rear toe-links.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-7
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if (g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine parts as and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test (h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is conditions:
recommended at least once a year.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, if
contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or − In hilly or mountainous terrain.
damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on − Uses such as high performance operation.
page 5-59 and Windshield and Wiper Blades on (i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service can
page 5-97 for more information. be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer perform
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-34 for what to
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any other use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling system and
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing pressure cap.
its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety (j) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint Systems may require replacement more often.
on page 1-58.
(k) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders and body door hinges. the filter at each engine oil change.
Lubricate all hinges and latches, including those for the
hood, rear compartment, console door, and any folding (l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
seat hardware. More frequent lubrication may be required obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will
make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or
squeak.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-8
(m) Drain, flush, and refill clutch hydraulic system at a Engine Oil Level Check
regular service interval (I or II) every two years. This
service can be complex; you should have your dealer/ Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
retailer perform this service. See Hydraulic Clutch on regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
page 5-31. keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
(n) Drain, flush, and refill intercooler system. This service damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer warranty.
perform this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-34. Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-19.
Owner Checks and Services Coolant Level Check
These owner checks and services should be performed Check the engine coolant level and, on ZR1 models,
at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety, check the intercooler coolant level. Add DEX-COOL®
dependability, and emission control performance. Your coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and services. on page 5-34.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12. washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
At Least Once a Month
each fuel fill.
Tire Inspection and Inflation Check
Inspect the vehicle’s tires for wear and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-71.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-9
At Least Once a Year Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
Starter Switch Check

{ CAUTION: { CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured. others could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough 1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular level surface.
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-32. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to on page 2-32.
turn off the engine immediately if it starts. Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
3. For automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the the vehicle begins to move.
engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only in 3. With the engine off and without applying the regular
P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts in any brake, try to move the shift lever out of P (Park)
other position, contact your dealer/retailer for service. with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
For manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer for service.
in Neutral, push the clutch pedal down halfway, and
try to start the engine. The vehicle should start only
when the clutch pedal is pushed down all the way to
the floor. If the vehicle starts when the clutch pedal is
not pushed all the way down, contact your dealer/
retailer for service.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-10
Parking Brake and Automatic Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill.
Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism brake.
Check • To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the
engine running and transmission in N (Neutral),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
{ CAUTION: pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could • To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability:
begin to move. You or others could be injured and With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then
property could be damaged. Make sure there is release the parking brake followed by the regular
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll. brake.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
should the vehicle begin to move.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-11
Recommended Fluids and Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Lubricants 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
®
Engine Coolant water and use only DEX-COOL
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
number, or specification can be obtained from your page 5-34.
dealer/retailer. ZR1 Only: 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
Intercooler water and use only DEX-COOL®
System Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
Usage Fluid/Lubricant page 5-34.
The engine requires a special engine
Hydraulic Brake DOT
3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M. (GM Part No. U.S. 88862806,
Oils meeting this standard can be System in Canada 88862807).
identified as synthetic, and should
also be identified with the American Windshield Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for Washer
Engine Oil Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Hydraulic Clutch Fluid. Use only
However, not all synthetic API oils Hydraulic GM Part No. U.S. 88958860,
with the starburst symbol will meet Clutch System in Canada 88901244, Super DOT-4
this GM standard. Look for and use brake fluid.
only an oil that meets GM Standard
Power Steering GM
Power Steering Fluid
GM4718M. For the proper viscosity, (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
see Engine Oil on page 5-19. System
in Canada 89021186).

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-12
 Usage Fluid/Lubricant Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Chassis Lubricant Hood Latch
Lubrication (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, Assembly, Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(Rear Toe-Link Secondary (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Outer Ends with in Canada 88901242) or lubricant Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
ZO6, ZR1, or meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Spring meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Z51 Option) Category LB or GC-LB. Anchor, and Category LB or GC-LB.
Manual Transmission Fluid Release Pawl
Manual
(GM Part No. U.S. 88861800, Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Transmission in Canada 88861801). Hood and Door (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Hinges
Automatic DEXRON®-VI Automatic in Canada 10953474).
Transmission Transmission Fluid. Weatherstrip Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Key Lock (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Cylinders Conditioning Dielectric Silicone Grease
in Canada 10953474).
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
Rear Axle DEXRON® LS Gear Oil. See Rear in Canada 992887).
(Limited-Slip
Differential) Axle on page 5-54.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-13
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
6.2L LS3 V8 and 7.0L LS7 V8 Engines 15776148 A3077C
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine 25940997 A3107C
Engine Oil Filter
6.2L LS3 V8 Engines 89017524 PF48
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine 12626224 UPF-48R
7.0L LS7 V8 Engine 12626224 UPF-48R
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 15848592 CF139
Spark Plug
6.2L LS3 V8 Engine 12609877 41-985
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine 12571165 41-104
7.0L LS7 V8 Engine 12571165 41-104
Wiper Blades — 20.7 in (52.5 cm)
Driver Side 12335960 —
Passenger Side 12335961 —

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-14
Engine Drive Belt Routing

6.2L LS9 V8 Engine

6.2L LS3 V8, 7.0L LS7 V8 Engines

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-15
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-16
 Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-17
 Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-18
 Section 7 Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2 Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-15
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2 Reporting Safety Defects to the
Online Owner Center ......................................7-5 United States Government ..........................7-15
Customer Assistance for Reporting Safety Defects to the
Text Telephone (TTY) Users .........................7-6 Canadian Government ................................7-16
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-6 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-16
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-7 Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-16
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-7 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-17
Scheduling Service Appointments ....................7-10 Event Data Recorders ...................................7-18
Courtesy Transportation Program ....................7-11 OnStar® ......................................................7-19
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-12 Navigation System ........................................7-19
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ..............7-19

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-1
Customer Assistance and STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
Information resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General Motors
Customer Satisfaction Procedure of Canada Customer Communication Centre at
1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with the We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to
sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following
resolved by the dealer’s sales or service departments. information available to give the Customer Assistance
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all Representative:
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available
has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
steps should be taken:
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of the windshield.
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be • Dealership name and location.
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts manager, • Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
contact the owner of the dealership or the general When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your
manager. concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest following Step One first.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-2
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if address:
you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the BBB Auto Line Program
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line 4200 Wilson Boulevard
Program to enforce your rights. Suite 800
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program Arlington, VA 22203-1838
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or [Link]/goauto
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. This program is available in all 50 states and the District
Although you may be required to resort to this informal of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage,
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to
use of the program is free of charge and your case will change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree participation in this program.
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-3
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that For further information concerning eligibility in the
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2, call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
Program. General Motors of Canada Limited has The Mediation/Arbitration Program
committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes c/o Customer Communication Centre
involving factory-related vehicle service claims. General Motors of Canada Limited
The program provides for the review of the facts involved Mail Code: CA1-163-005
by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,
from the time you file your complaint to the final decision, Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
should be completed in about 70 days. We believe our Identification Number (VIN).
impartial program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of
charge.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-4
Online Owner Center My GM Canada (Canada) — [Link]
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
Online Owner Center (U.S.) — [Link] where you can save information on
[Link]/chevrolet GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place. Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
• Digital owner manual, warranty information,
and more • My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Online service and maintenance records
• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address
• Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide and phone number for each of your preferred
• Exclusive privileges and offers GM dealers/retailers.
• Recall notices for your specific vehicle • My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
service estimates, check trade-in values, or
• ®
OnStar and GM Cardmember Services Earnings schedule a service appointment by adding the
summaries vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
Other Helpful Links: • My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
Chevrolet — [Link] and forms with greater ease.

Chevrolet Merchandise — [Link] To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
[Link].
Help Center — [Link]/helpcenter
• FAQ
• Contact Us

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-5
Customer Assistance for Text From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
Telephone (TTY) Users 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or From U.S. Virgin Islands:
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), 1-800-496-9994
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can
Canada — Customer Assistance
communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV General Motors of Canada Limited
(2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Customer Assistance Offices
[Link]
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free 1-800-263-3777 (English)
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes 1-800-263-7854 (French)
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
addressed to: Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
United States — Customer Assistance Overseas — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
[Link]
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-6
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer [Link] or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
Col. Lomas de Bezares call 1-800-263-3830.
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000 Roadside Assistance Program
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1-800-CHEV-USA
GM Mobility Reimbursement (1-800-243-8872); (Text telephone (TTY):
1-888-889-2438).
Program For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

This program, available to qualified applicants, can

reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-7
Calling for Assistance Coverage
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles
information ready: (160 000 km), whichever comes first.
• Your name, home address, and home telephone In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.
number In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not covered.
• Telephone number of your location
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
• Location of the vehicle Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
vehicle or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or payment to an owner or driver
• Description of the problem if they decide the claims are made too often, or the same
type of claim is made many times.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-8
Services Provided Services Not Included in Roadside
• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel Assistance
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station. • Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the • Legal fines.
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar®. For security • Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
reasons, the driver must present identification chains, or other traction devices.
before this service is given. • Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
• Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway: non-public road or highway.
Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer for warranty
service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot Services Specific to Canadian
be driven. Assistance is also given when the vehicle Purchased Vehicles
is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.
• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a $5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted.
flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped, Propane and other fuels are not provided through
must be in good condition and properly inflated. this service.
It is the owner’s responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the • Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
warranty. • Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump America are provided when requested either with
start a dead battery. the most direct route or the most scenic route.
There is a limit of six requests per year.
Additional travel information is also available.
Allow three weeks for delivery.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-9
 • Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must Scheduling Service Appointments
be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was
started to qualify. General Motors of Canada When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
Limited requires pre-authorization, original detailed your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
receipts, and a copy of the repair orders. Once By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
authorization has been received, the Roadside service consultant of your transportation needs, your
Assistance advisor will help you make arrangements dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
and explain how to receive payment. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
advisor may give you permission to get local safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
emergency road service. You will receive payment, let them know this, and ask for instructions.
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
covered, however any cost for parts and labor day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
for repairs not covered by the warranty are
the owner responsibility.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-10
Courtesy Transportation Program Transportation Options
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our Warranty service can generally be completed while you
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
period in Canada) and extended powertrain, and hybrid your dealer can offer you one of the following:
specific warranty in both the U.S. and Canada. Shuttle Service
Several courtesy transportation options are available to Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you with
repairs are required. shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle interruption of your daily schedule. This includes one-way
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time and
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-11
Courtesy Rental Vehicle Collision Damage Repair
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight warranty the proper equipment and quality replacement parts.
repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited and must Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your vehicle’s
be supported by original receipts. This requires that you resale value, and safety performance can be
sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state/ compromised in subsequent collisions.
provincial, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age Collision Parts
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive same materials and construction methods as the parts
mileage, or rental usage beyond the completion of the with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
repair. Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety are
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
courtesy rental. maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Additional Program Information Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be
Transportation arrangements will be administered an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s originally
by appropriate dealer personnel. designed appearance and safety performance, however,
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility any related failures are not covered by that warranty.
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-12
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are Insuring Your Vehicle
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions. There are significant differences in the quality of
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related Many insurance policies provide reduced protection
to such parts are not covered by that warranty. to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
Repair Facility insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we
We recommend that you choose a collision repair recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
facility that meets your needs before you ever need with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a insurance coverage is not available from your current
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and insurance carrier, consider switching to another
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend insurance carrier.
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment. If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at
the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-13
If a Crash Occurs • Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash. number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
• Check to make sure that you are all right. If you are plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
uninjured, make sure that no one else in your Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured. policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all • If possible, call your insurance company from the
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
only if its position puts you in danger or you are information they will need. If they ask for a police
instructed to move it by a police officer. report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
• Give only the necessary and requested information the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
to police and other parties involved in the crash. with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental necessary. This is especially true if there are no
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
page 7-7 for more information. make sure you are comfortable with them.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the their work for a long time.
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name, • Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
the service’s name, and the phone number. make sure you understand what work will be
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
information and registration if you keep these items this opportunity.
in your vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-14
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Reporting Safety Defects
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs, Reporting Safety Defects to the
GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair.
If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take
United States Government
your vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
facility that any required replacement collision parts be could cause a crash or could cause injury or
original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts or death, you should immediately inform the National
recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty. in addition to notifying General Motors.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
your insurance company may initially value the repair exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember become involved in individual problems between
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
If another party’s insurance company is paying for (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to [Link];
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair or write to:
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with Administrator, NHTSA
that company. In such cases, you can have control of 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within Washington D.C., 20590
reasonable limits. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from [Link].

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the Service Publications Ordering
Canadian Government Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada Service Manuals
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to: information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
Transport Canada brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road Service Bulletins
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Reporting Safety Defects to Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
General Motors instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors. Owner Information
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write: Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
Chevrolet Motor Division about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center Maintenance Schedule for all models.
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or Warranty Booklet.
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write: RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
General Motors of Canada Limited Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-16
Current and Past Model Order Forms Vehicle Data Recording and
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available Privacy
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
the vehicle. computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123 your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM control engine and transmission performance, to monitor
Eastern Time the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy
airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide
For Credit Card Orders Only antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. These modules may store data to help your
on the World Wide Web at: [Link] dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some
Or you can write to: modules may also store data about how you operate the
vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average
Helm, Incorporated
speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207 personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat
positions, and temperature settings.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-17
Event Data Recorders Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle during a crash investigation.
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
is designed to record such data as: In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety access to the vehicle or the EDR.
belts were buckled/fastened
GM will not access this data or share it with others
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
accelerator and/or brake pedal vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
• How fast the vehicle was traveling response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
This data can help provide a better understanding of the through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-18
OnStar® Radio Frequency
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the Identification (RFID)
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and use. RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
See also OnStar® System on page 2-41 in this manual for such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
more information. security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
Navigation System openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the GM system containing personal information.
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-19
✍ NOTES

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-20
 A Antenna
Diversity ................................................... 3-110
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3 Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio
Accessory Power ............................................ 2-24 Antenna System ......................................... 3-110
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-24 Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-5
Active Handling System ..................................... 4-7 Warning Light ............................................. 3-41
Active Handling System Light ........................... 3-42 Appearance Care
Additional Required Services, Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-99
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-6 Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-95
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-7 Cargo Cover and Convenience Net ................ 5-94
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-102 Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 5-101
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-28 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-96
Air Dam, Front ............................................... 2-22 Coated Moldings ......................................... 5-94
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment .................... 3-31 Convertible Top ........................................... 5-98
Airbag Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-93
Adding Equipment to Your Fiberglass Springs ..................................... 5-100
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................ 1-56 Finish Care ................................................. 5-96
Airbag System Finish Damage .......................................... 5-100
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-49 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-51 Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 5-94
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-56 Interior Cleaning .......................................... 5-91
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-49 Leather ...................................................... 5-94
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-50 Removable Roof Panel ................................. 5-98
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-48 Tires ........................................................ 5-100
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-46 Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-100
Airbags Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-95
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-37 Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-95
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-36 Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-97
System Check ............................................. 1-44

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1
Ashtray ......................................................... 3-25 Brakes .......................................................... 5-43
Assistance Program, Roadside ........................... 7-7 Antilock ....................................................... 4-5
Audio System ................................................. 3-82 Parking ...................................................... 2-32
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-108 System Warning Light .................................. 3-40
Navigation/Radio System, Braking ........................................................... 4-4
see Navigation Manual .............................. 3-97 Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-5
Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-82 Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-21
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-110 Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-59
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-83 Fog Lamps ................................................. 3-17
Audio Systems Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-56
Radio Reception ........................................ 3-109 Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-55
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-107 Headlamps ................................................. 5-56
Automatic Door Lock ....................................... 2-13 Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Automatic Transmission and Parking Lamps .................................. 5-57
Fluid .......................................................... 5-31 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 5-56
Operation ................................................... 2-26 Taillamps, Turn Signal and Stoplamps ............ 5-58
Axle, Rear ..................................................... 5-54 Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-78

B C
Battery .......................................................... 5-49 Calibration ..................................................... 2-38
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... 3-18 California
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-19 Perchlorate Materials Requirements ................. 5-4
Belt Routing, Engine ....................................... 6-15 Warning ....................................................... 5-4
Bluetooth® ..................................................... 3-97 California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
Boost Gage ................................................... 3-50 Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Brake Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-110
Emergencies ................................................ 4-5

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2
Carbon Monoxide ............................................ 2-14 Cleaning (cont.)
Engine Exhaust ........................................... 2-36 Finish Care ................................................. 5-96
Winter Driving ............................................. 4-20 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Care of Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 5-94
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-95 Interior ....................................................... 5-91
Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-55 Leather ...................................................... 5-94
CD, MP3 ....................................................... 3-94 Removable Roof Panel ................................. 5-98
Center Console Storage ................................... 2-52 Tires ........................................................ 5-100
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-85 Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-100
Check Engine Lamp ........................................ 3-44 Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-95
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-12 Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-95
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5-101 Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-97
Child Restraints Climate Control System
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-29 Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-30
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Climate Control Systems
Children .......................................... 1-35, 1-36 Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-25
Older Children ............................................. 1-25 Clock, Setting ................................................. 3-82
Securing a Child Restraint in the Clutch, Hydraulic ............................................. 5-31
Right Front Seat Position .......................... 1-40 Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-12
Systems ..................................................... 1-33 Compass ....................................................... 2-38
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-25 Competitive Driving, Racing or Other ................. 4-14
Circuit Breakers ............................................ 5-103 Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-3
Cleaning Convenience Net ............................................ 2-55
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-99 Convertible Top ...................................... 2-62, 2-69
Cargo Cover and Convenience Net ................ 5-94 Coolant
Coated Moldings ......................................... 5-94 Engine ....................................................... 5-34
Convertible Top ........................................... 5-98 Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-43
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 5-96 Cooling System ...................................... 5-32, 5-33
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-93 Courtesy Lamps ............................................. 3-19
Fiberglass Springs ..................................... 5-100 Courtesy Transportation Program ...................... 7-11
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10 Door
Cupholders .................................................... 2-52 Automatic Door Lock .................................... 2-13
Customer Assistance ......................................... 7-6 Locks ........................................................ 2-10
Offices ......................................................... 7-6 Power Locks ............................................... 2-12
Text Telephone (TTY) Users ........................... 7-6 Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............ 2-13
Customer Information Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-50
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-16 DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-50
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ........................ 7-2 DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-73
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-56
Other Messages .......................................... 3-72
D Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-16
Damage Repair, Collision ................................. 7-12
Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-18
Data Recorders
Better Fuel Economy ..................................... 4-2
Event ......................................................... 7-18
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ......................... 3-16
Drunk .......................................................... 4-3
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-18
Disc, MP3 ...................................................... 3-94
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-19
Displays
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-17
Head-Up .................................................... 3-20
Loss of Control ........................................... 4-12
Diversity Antenna System ............................... 3-110
Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 4-12
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-22
Winter ........................................................ 4-20
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-25

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4
 E Engine Oil
Life System ................................................ 5-26
EDR ............................................................. 7-17 Entry/Exit Lighting ........................................... 3-19
Electrical Equipment Event Data Recorders ..................................... 7-18
Add-On Equipment ..................................... 5-102 Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-25
Electrical System Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-14
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 5-106 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .......................... 3-18
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-103
Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 5-102
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-103
Power Windows and Other Power Options .... 5-103
F
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-103 Filter
Engine Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-28
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-28 Finish Damage ............................................. 5-100
Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp ........... 3-44 Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6
Compartment Overview ................................ 5-14 Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8
Coolant ...................................................... 5-34 Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-90
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-43 Floor Mats ..................................................... 2-53
Cooling System ................................... 5-32, 5-33 Fluid
Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-15 Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-31
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-36 Power Steering ........................................... 5-41
Oil ............................................................. 5-19 Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-42
Oil Pressure Gage ....................................... 3-47 Fog Lamps
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-41 Bulb Replacement ....................................... 3-17
Overheating ................................................ 5-39 Light .......................................................... 3-48
Starting ...................................................... 2-24 Front Air Dam ................................................ 2-22

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5 Gasoline
Additives ...................................................... 5-7 Octane ........................................................ 5-5
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6 Specifications ............................................... 5-6
Economy Driving ........................................... 4-2 Glove Box ..................................................... 2-52
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-11 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-7
Filling the Tank ............................................. 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-8
Gage ......................................................... 3-49
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
H
Halogen Bulbs ................................................ 5-56
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-6
Hatch/Trunk ................................................... 2-14
Fuses
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 5-106
Headlamp Wiring ........................................... 5-102
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-103
Headlamps
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-103
Aiming ....................................................... 5-55
Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-103
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-56
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ..................... 3-16
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-14
G Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
Gages Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and
Boost ......................................................... 3-50 Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-57
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-43 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 5-56
Engine Oil Pressure ..................................... 3-47 High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
Fuel .......................................................... 3-49 On Reminder .............................................. 3-15
Speedometer .............................................. 3-35 Wiper Activated ........................................... 3-15
Tachometer ................................................. 3-35 Head-Up Display (HUD) ................................... 3-20
Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 3-38 Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-44 Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-48

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6
High-Speed Operation, Tires ............................. 5-72
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-18 J
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-19 Jump Starting ................................................. 5-50
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-12
Release ..................................................... 5-13
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
K
Keyless Access System ..................................... 2-4
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-14 Keyless Access System, Operation ...................... 2-5
Hydraulic Clutch ............................................. 5-31 Keys ............................................................... 2-3

I L
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-23 Labeling, Tire Sidewall ..................................... 5-64
Immobilizer .................................................... 2-20 Lamps
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-29 Courtesy .................................................... 3-19
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-71 Daytime Running (DRL) ................................ 3-16
Installing the Roof Panel .................................. 2-61 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... 3-18
Instrument Panel Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-44
Brightness .................................................. 3-19 Reading ..................................................... 3-19
Cluster ....................................................... 3-33 Twilight Sentinel® ........................................ 3-17
Overview ..................................................... 3-4 Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 1-22
Introduction ...................................................... 6-2 LATCH System for Child Restraints ........... 1-35, 1-36

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7
Latches, Seatback ............................................ 1-8 Locks
Lifting the Vehicle, Tires ................................... 5-86 Automatic Door Lock .................................... 2-13
Lighting Door .......................................................... 2-10
Entry/Exit ................................................... 3-19 Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-13
Lights Power Door ................................................ 2-12
Active Handling System ................................ 3-42 Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............ 2-13
Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-36 Loss of Control ............................................... 4-12
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning ............ 3-41 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 1-35, 1-36
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-40 Lumbar
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-14 Power and Side Bolsters ................................ 1-3
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
Fog Lamps ................................................. 3-48
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-48
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
M
Maintenance
Lights On Reminder ..................................... 3-48
Footnotes ..................................................... 6-7
On Reminder .............................................. 3-15
Schedule, Additional Required Services ............ 6-6
One-to-Four Shift ......................................... 3-39
Maintenance Schedule
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-37
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9
Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 3-35
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
Security ..................................................... 3-48
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10
Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-43
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-16
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-41
Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 6-14
Limited-Slip Rear Axle ....................................... 4-9
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-23
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4 O
Using .......................................................... 6-2 Odometer ...................................................... 3-35
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2 Off-Road
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................... 3-44 Recovery .................................................... 4-12
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2 Oil
Manual Transmission Engine ....................................................... 5-19
Fluid .......................................................... 5-31 Engine Oil Life System ................................. 5-26
Operation ................................................... 2-30 Engine Oil Pressure Gage ............................ 3-47
Memory Seat, Mirrors, Steering Wheel Controls .... 1-4 Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-25
Message One-to-Four Shift Light .................................... 3-39
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-56 Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-5
Mirrors OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-19
Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 2-38 OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-41
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-40 Operation, Universal Home Remote System ........ 2-45
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-40 Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-30
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-41 Outlets
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-40 Accessory Power ......................................... 3-24
MP3 ............................................................. 3-94 Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror ............................. 2-40
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-40
N Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-41
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-40
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-19 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode .... 5-41
Navigation/Radio System, Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9
see Navigation Manual ................................. 3-97 Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
Net, Convenience ........................................... 2-55
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-21

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
9
 P Privacy .......................................................... 7-17
Navigation System ....................................... 7-19
Paint, Damage .............................................. 5-100 OnStar ....................................................... 7-19
Panel, Roof .................................................... 2-57 Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ............. 7-19
Park Program
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-33 Courtesy Transportation ................................ 7-11
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-34 Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............... 2-13
Parking Proposition 65 Warning, California ....................... 5-4
Brake ........................................................ 2-32
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-35
Parking Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-35
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-37
R
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-31 Racing or Other Competitive Driving .................. 4-14
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-51 Radio Frequency
Passing ......................................................... 4-12 Identification (RFID) ..................................... 7-19
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California ...... 5-4 Radio(s) ........................................................ 3-83
Phone Radios
Bluetooth® .................................................. 3-97 Navigation/Radio System,
Power see Navigation Manual .............................. 3-97
Door Locks ................................................. 2-12 Reception ................................................. 3-109
Electrical System ....................................... 5-103 Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-82
Lumbar and Side Bolsters .............................. 1-3 Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-107
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-24 Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-19
Seat ............................................................ 1-3 Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-54
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-41 Limited-Slip .................................................. 4-9
Windows .................................................... 2-17 Rear Storage ................................................. 2-53
Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts .......................... 1-24 Rearview Mirrors
Automatic Dimming ...................................... 2-38

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-6
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12 S
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-28 Safety Belts
Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility ................. 7-7 Care of ...................................................... 5-95
Remote, Keyless Access System ........................ 2-4 Extender .................................................... 1-25
Removing the Roof Panel ................................ 2-57 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-14
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-59 Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-22
Replacement Parts Reminders .................................................. 3-35
Maintenance ............................................... 6-14 Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-9
Reporting Safety Defects Use During Pregnancy ................................. 1-24
General Motors ........................................... 7-16 Safety Defects Reporting
U.S. Government ......................................... 7-15 General Motors ........................................... 7-16
Restraint System Check U.S. Government ......................................... 7-15
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-58 Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Replacing Restraint System Parts Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
After a Crash .......................................... 1-59 Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-24 Scheduling Appointments ................................. 7-10
Ride Control Systems Seatback Latches ............................................. 1-8
Active Handling ............................................. 4-7 Seats
Limited Slip Rear Axle ................................... 4-9 Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4
Selective ...................................................... 4-9 Memory, Mirrors ............................................ 1-4
Roadside Assistance Program ............................ 7-7 Power Lumbar and Side Bolsters .................... 1-3
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-22 Power Seats ................................................. 1-3
Roof Panel .................................................... 2-57 Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-6
Installing the Roof Panel ............................... 2-61 Securing a Child Restraint
Removing the Roof Panel ............................. 2-57 Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-40
Storing the Roof Panel ................................. 2-60 Security
Run-Flat Tires ................................................ 5-69 Light .......................................................... 3-48
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................... 2-37 Selective Ride Control ....................................... 4-9

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11
Service ........................................................... 5-3 Storing the Roof Panel .................................... 2-60
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3 Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-22
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-18
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-5
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Lamp ...................................... 3-44
Parts Identification Label ............................. 5-102
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-35
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-16
Taillamps
Scheduling Appointments .............................. 7-10
Turn Signal, and Stoplamps .......................... 5-58
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-56
Text Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-6
Setting the Clock ............................................ 3-82
Theft - Deterrent System .................................. 2-18
Shifting
Theft-Deterrent Feature .................................. 3-107
Out of Park ................................................ 2-34
Theft-Deterrent Systems .......................... 2-18, 2-20
Shifting Into Park ............................................ 2-33
Immobilizer ................................................. 2-20
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6
Specifications and Capacities .......................... 5-110
Time, Setting .................................................. 3-82
Speedometer .................................................. 3-35
Tires ............................................................. 5-62
Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-24
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Steering ........................................................ 4-10
Cleaning ................................................. 5-99
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-108
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-78
Steering Wheel Controls, Memory ....................... 1-4
Chains ....................................................... 5-85
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6
Cleaning ................................................... 5-100
Storage Areas
Different Size .............................................. 5-80
Center Console ........................................... 2-52
High-Speed Operation .................................. 5-72
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-55
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-90
Cupholders ................................................. 2-52
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-71
Glove Box .................................................. 2-52
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-77
Rear .......................................................... 2-53
Lifting the Vehicle ........................................ 5-86

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
12
Tires (cont.) Trunk/Hatch ................................................... 2-14
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-43 Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-75 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-73 Twilight Sentinel® ............................................ 3-17
Run-Flat ..................................................... 5-69
Sidewall Labeling ......................................... 5-64
Terminology and Definitions ........................... 5-66
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-80
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-80
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-82
Universal Home Remote System ....................... 2-44
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-82
Operation ................................................... 2-45
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-77
Winter ........................................................ 5-63
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-28 V
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-28 Vehicle
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-28 Control ........................................................ 4-3
Traction Loading ...................................................... 4-23
Active Handling System ................................. 4-7 Parking Your ............................................... 2-35
Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-6 Running While Parked .................................. 2-37
Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-41 Symbols ......................................................... iii
Limited-Slip Rear Axle .................................... 4-9 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-17
Selective Ride Control ................................... 4-9 Vehicle Identification
Transmission Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-101
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-31 Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-102
Fluid, Manual .............................................. 5-31 Vehicle Personalization
One-to-Four Shift Light ................................. 3-39 DIC ........................................................... 3-73
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-26 Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-30
Transmission Operation, Manual ........................ 2-30 Visors ........................................................... 2-18
Transportation Program, Courtesy ...................... 7-11 Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-38

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
13
 W Windshield (cont.)
Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-59
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 3-32 Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-97
Warnings Wiper Fuses ............................................. 5-103
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-56 Wipers ......................................................... 3-9
Hazard Flashers ............................................ 3-6 Winter Driving ................................................ 4-20
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii Winter Tires ................................................... 5-63
Wheels Wiper Activated Headlamps .............................. 3-15
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-82
Different Size .............................................. 5-80
Replacement ............................................... 5-82
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................... 5-77
X
Windows ....................................................... 2-16 XM Radio Messages ....................................... 3-96
Power ........................................................ 2-17 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-110
Windshield
Replacement ............................................... 5-59
Washer ...................................................... 3-10 Y
Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-42 Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
14